3 Series GranTurismo 01402920413 1307 En-Us BA 1307 f34 Print Ue PDF

Contents Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate Driving

Machine
THE BMW 3 SERIES

GRAN TURISMO.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

3 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Gran Turismo Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/13, 07 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 182 Refueling
page 230. 184 Fuel
185 Wheels and tires
195 Engine compartment
6 Notes
197 Engine oil
At a glance 200 Coolant
12 Cockpit 201 Maintenance
16 iDrive 203 Replacing components
24 Voice activation system 214 Breakdown assistance
27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 220 Care
Controls Reference
32 Opening and closing 226 Technical data
48 Adjusting 230 Everything from A to Z
58 Transporting children safely
62 Driving
74 Displays
90 Lamps
95 Safety
117 Driving stability control systems
123 Driving comfort
146 Climate control
153 Interior equipment
162 Storage compartments
Driving tips
168 Things to remember when driving
171 Loading
174 Saving fuel

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
Refers to measures that can be taken to
ular topic is by using the index.
help protect the environment.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter. Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
Updates made after the editorial
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
deadline
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
Vehicle equipment
vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
User's manual for Navigation, all standard, country-specific and optional
Entertainment, Communication equipment that is offered in the model series.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment
munication and the short commands of the is also described and illustrated that is not
voice activation system are described in a sep‐ available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the
arate user's manual, which is also included selected optional equipment or the country-
with the onboard literature. specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
Additional sources of information and systems.
Should you have any questions, your service For options and equipment not described in
center will be glad to advise you at any time. this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is plementary Owner's Manuals.
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
Status of the Owner's
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐ Manual
hicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ policy of constant development that is con‐
tion. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
lect individual functions.
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ those in your vehicle.
tivation system.
6
Notes
Updates made after the editorial alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
deadline wheels, suspension components, brake dust
Any updates made after the editorial deadline shields, telephones, including operation of any
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ mobile phone from within the vehicle without
pendix of the printed quick reference for the using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
vehicle. ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
For your own safety electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
Maintenance and repairs
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern placement, or repair of the emission control
materials and high-performance electronics, devices and systems may be performed by any
requires suitable maintenance and repair automotive repair establishment or individual
methods. using any certified automotive part.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ California laws require us to state the following
ately trained personnel. warning:
If this work is not carried out properly, there is Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
the danger of subsequent damage and related bile components and parts, including compo‐
safety hazards. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Parts and Accessories State of California to cause cancer and birth
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐ defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐ certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
chase accessories tested and approved by products of component wear contain or emit
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐ chemicals known to the State of California to
ously acquire the assurance that they have cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure op‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
timum performance when installed on your ve‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
hicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
from defects in material and workmanship. engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
BMW will not accept any liability for damage cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
resulting from installation of parts and acces‐ your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
sories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot water.
test every product made by other manufactur‐
ers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely Service and warranty
and without risk to either the vehicle, its opera‐ We recommend that you read this publication
tion, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
BMW Accessories and other products ap‐ lowing warranties:
proved by BMW, together with professional
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
advice on using these items, are available from
all BMW centers. Installation and operation of ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
non-BMW approved accessories such as
7
Notes
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Data memory

ranty.
Many electronic components on your vehicle
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
ited Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
Detailed information about these warranties is and faults. This technical information generally
listed in the Service and Warranty Information documents the state of a component, a mod‐
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and ule, a system or the environment:
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Operating states of system components,
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and fill levels for instance.
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
ditions and homologation requirements in your its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
country and continental region in order to de‐ tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle transverse acceleration.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
to operate your vehicle in another country or
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
conditions and homologation requirements. tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐
You should also be aware of any applicable gagement of stability control systems.
warranty limitations or exclusions for such ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
country or region. In such case, please contact This data is purely technical in nature and is
Customer Relations for further information. used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
Maintenance routes traveled cannot be created from this
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New pair services, service processes, warranty
Vehicle Limited Warranty. claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ mation can be read out from the event and
ures: fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system
nostic tools. You can obtain further information
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected,
for US models the information in the fault memory is deleted
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for or overwritten on a continuous basis.
Canadian models When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐
If the vehicle is not maintained according to ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐
these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ciate this technical data with individuals if it is
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐
Warranty. ness accounts — possibly with the assistance
of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐
8
Notes
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle Reporting safety defects

data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
Event Data Recorder EDR and operated in the US.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
The EDR is designed to record data related to wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a 1-800-831-1117.
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
less. open an investigation, and if it finds that a
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
such data as: may order a recall and remedy campaign.
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
operating. individual problems between you, your dealer,
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger or BMW of North America, LLC.
safety belts were fastened. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
These data can help provide a better under‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
standing of the circumstances in which formation about motor vehicle safety from
crashes and injuries occur. http://www.safercar.gov
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are For Canadian customers
recorded by the EDR under normal driving Canadian customers who wish to report a
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
ment, could combine the EDR data with the also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
9
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies
equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
All around the steering wheel
1 Active rear spoiler 119 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Rear window safety switch 45 tion 113
3 Power windows 44 Intelligent Safety 104

4 Exterior mirror operation 55 Collision warning with City Brak‐
5 Glove compartment on the driver's ing function 105.
side 162 Lane departure warning 111
Driver assistance systems
6 Lamps
12
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lamps 93 Reduce distance 125
Parking lamps 90 Increase distance 125
Low beams 90 Cruise control rocker switch 130, 124

9 Instrument cluster 74
Automatic headlamp con‐ 10 Steering wheel buttons, right
trol 91
Entertainment source
Daytime running lights 91
Adaptive Light Control 91
Volume
High-beam Assistant 92
Instrument lighting 93
Voice activation 24
7 Steering column stalk, left

Telephone, see user's manual for
Turn signal 67 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 85

lamp flasher 67 11 Steering column stalk, right
High-beam Assistant 92 Windshield wipers 67
Roadside parking lamps 91 Rain sensor 68
Computer 85 Clean the windshields and head‐

lamps 69
8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 63
Store speed 129
Auto Start/Stop function 64
Resume speed 131
13 Horn
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ 14 Steering wheel heating 57
ing 130
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

15 Adjust steering wheel 57
terrupting 123
16 Open the tailgate 38
13
At a glance Cockpit
17 Unlock hood 196
All around the center console
1 Headliner 15 9 Parking brake 66

2 Control Display 16 10 PDC Park Distance Control 131
3 Ventilation 151 Rearview camera 134
4 Hazard warning system 214 Parking assistant 140
Surround View 134
Central locking system 35 11 Driving Dynamics Control 120
5 Glove compartment 162 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 117
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
12 Automatic transmission selector
nication
lever 70
7 Climate control 146
Manual transmission selector lever 70
8 Controller with buttons 16
14
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 93

quest 214
2 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 5 Interior lamps 93
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

airbag 97
15
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control Display
All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

equipment that is offered in the model series is
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
equipment or country variant. This also applies Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
for safety-related functions and systems. be damaged.
Switching off
The concept
1. Press the button.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
2. "Switch off control display"
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance Switching on

Press the controller again to switch the screen
Controls back on.
Controller with navigation system

Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
select menu items and create the settings.
16
iDrive At a glance
2. Press. 1. Turn.
3. Move in four directions. 2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.

Buttons on controller
Press the but‐ Function

ton
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

Buttons on controller
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
Press the but‐ Function
BACK Displays the previous panel.
ton
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
MENU Open the main menu.
Controller without navigation system Audio Open audio menu last lis‐
tened to, switch between au‐
Select menu items and create settings.
dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
17
At a glance iDrive
Press the but‐ Function Menu items in the Owner's Manual

ton In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
BACK Open previous panel.
"Settings".
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Operating concept
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Opening the main menu The current panel is closed and the previ‐
Press the button. ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
ous display.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items

Menu items shown in white can be selected. White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu

2. Press the controller.
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
18
iDrive At a glance
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the 1. "Settings"
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is 2. "Touchpad"
displayed. 3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": letters and numbers, enter‐
Options menu
ing.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Map": operating the interactive map.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
This area remains unchanged.
▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters
▷ Control options for the selected main and numbers are announced.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for Entering letters and numbers
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". The entry of the letters requires some practice
at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to
Changing settings the following:
1. Select a field. ▷ For the entry of large/small letters and
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting numbers, first convert via iDrive to the cor‐
is displayed. responding Input mode, refer to page 22.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
Operating the interactive map

3. Press the controller. The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
19
At a glance iDrive
Function Controls 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is

highlighted, and then press the controller.
Interactive map. Slide in the correspond‐
ing direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag the display inwards

teractive map. or outwards with the fin‐
gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Changing settings
Settings on the control display, such as the 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do lighted, and then press the controller.
this slide to the left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock

Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is

displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
lighted, and then press the controller.
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
▷ Time.
to display "Time/Date".
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols

The symbols are grouped as follows.
20
iDrive At a glance
Radio symbols Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched

off.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning Split screen

Incoming or outgoing call.
General information
Missed call. Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Wireless network reception
from the computer.
strength.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
Symbol flashes: network search.
screen, this information remains visible even
Wireless network is not available. when you change to another menu.
Bluetooth is switched on.

Switching the split screen on and off
Roaming is active.
1. Press the button.
Text message was received.
2. "Split screen"
Check the SIM card.
Selecting the display
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing. 1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"
Enter the PIN.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
Entertainment symbols
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
Symbol Meaning
5. Select the desired menu item.
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface/mobile phone

audio interface.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
21
At a glance iDrive
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
▷ To display short information: touch the
The settings are stored for the remote control button.
currently in use.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Without navigation system and
telephone
Deleting the button assignments
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
approx. five seconds.
tertainment, Communication.
2. "OK"
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
Entering letters and numbers
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds. General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
Running a function bers.
Press the button. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
when a phone number is selected. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear Symbol Function
gloves or use objects.
Press the controller: delete the let‐
The key assignment is displayed at the top ter or number.
edge of the screen.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and

numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
22
iDrive At a glance
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system

Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the
entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
23
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
All standard, country-specific and optional
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
equipment or country variant. This also applies 2. Wait for the signal.
for safety-related functions and systems. 3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the cates that the voice activation system is active.
Control Display can be operated by spoken If no other commands are available, operate
commands via the voice activation system. the function in this case via iDrive.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries. Terminating the voice activation
▷ Functions that can only be used when the system
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated Briefly press the button on the steer‐
using the voice activation system. ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
Possible commands
system. Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
Requirements menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system Short commands exist for many functions.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
fied. also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
Set the language, refer to page 88. tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
24
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short Via short command

commands Playback of the CD can also be started via a
Functions on the main menu can be performed short command.
directly by means of short commands, nearly
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
irrespective of which menu item is currently
if necessary.
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation 2. Press the button on the steering
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ wheel.
munication Owner's Manual.
3. ›C D drive track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Setting the voice dialog
Additional commands for the help dialog: You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐ In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
portant commands for them are an‐ announcements from the system are issued in
nounced. an abbreviated form.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information On the Control Display:
about the principle of operation for the 1. "Settings"
voice activation system is announced.
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
Example: playing back a CD 4. Select the setting.
Via the main menu

The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
3. ›Multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back. Adjusting the volume
4. ›C D‹
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
5. ›C D drive‹ struction until the desired volume is set.
6. ›Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 214, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
26
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment Select components
All standard, country-specific and optional 1. Press the button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
ment is also described that is not available in a 3. Press the controller.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 4. Selecting desired range:
equipment or country variant. This also applies ▷ "Quick reference"
for safety-related functions and systems.
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the integrated

Owner's Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner's Manual
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities. Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
Quick Reference Guide
page is displayed.
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the Page by page without link access
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
the links.
can also be displayed during driving.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page.
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ Leaf back.
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward.
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
27
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons

temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the 2. Press the desired button for more
"Options" menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press the button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐

ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
29
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment Integrated key

equipment or country variant. This also applies
Remote control/key Press the button on the back of the remote

control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
Buttons on the remote control The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Replacing the battery
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the tailgate
4 Panic mode in alarm system
General information 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ control.
trols with keys. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
Every remote control contains a replaceable 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
battery. ment; see arrow 2.
The settings called up and implemented when 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
the car is unlocked depend on which remote positive side facing upwards.
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ 5. Press the cover closed.
file, refer to page 33.
Take the used battery to a recycling
Information on the required maintenance is center or to your service center.
stored in the remote control as well. Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 201
32
Opening and closing Controls
New remote controls Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check

You can obtain new remote controls from your Control message appears, hold the remote
service center. control, as shown, against the marked area on
the steering column and press the Start/Stop
Loss of the remote controls button within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch pedal.
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency detection of remote Personal Profile

control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start The concept
the engine in situations such as the following: You can set several of your vehicle's functions
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ to suit your personal needs and preferences.
mote control by external sources. ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. profile currently activated.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐ ▷ The remote control used is detected when
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐ the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
mote control. file is called up.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
charger while charging items such as mo‐ and called up again even if the vehicle has
bile devices in the vehicle. been used in the meantime by someone
else with another remote control.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start The individual settings are stored for three
the engine. Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Starting the engine with emergency Transmitting the settings

detection of the remote control Your personal settings can be taken with you
to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. For more information, contact
your service center.
The settings are transmitted as follows:
▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer.
▷ BMW Online.
Profile management
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Opening the profiles

Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ A different profile can be called up than the
mote control, as shown, against the marked one associated with the remote control cur‐
area on the steering column and press the rently in use.
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
pressing the brake. 1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
33
3. Select a profile. USB interface: "USB device"

Called up profile is assigned to the remote
control being used at the time. Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
Renaming profiles ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
1. "Settings" sonal Profiles.
2. "Profiles" This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
The current profile is selected.
own profile.
3. Open "Options".
1. "Settings"
4. "Rename current profile"
2. "Profiles"
Resetting profiles The current profile is selected.
The settings of the active profile are reset to 3. Open "Guest".
their default values. 4. Create the settings.
1. "Settings" Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
2. "Profiles"
Display profile list during start
The current profile is selected.
The profile list can be displayed during each
3. Open "Options".
start for selecting the desired profile.
4. "Reset current profile"
1. "Settings"
Importing profiles 2. "Profiles"
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten 3. Open "Options".
with the imported profile. 4. "Display user list at startup"
1. "Settings"
Personal Profile settings
2. "Profiles"
The following functions and settings can be
3. "Import profile"
stored in a profile.
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
▷ Collision warning: warning time.
USB interface: "USB device"
▷ Exterior mirror position.
Exporting profiles ▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to

last.
Most settings of the active profile and the
saved contacts can be exported. ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving ▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle ▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐
to a workshop for example. trieved after unlocking.
1. "Settings" ▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐

ment.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness,
3. "Export profile"
position and rotation of the display.
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
34
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ ▷ Via the button on the tailgate.
ting. The following takes place simultaneously
▷ Tone: tone settings. when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐ mote control:
mate control with enhanced features: set‐ ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,
tings. the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
output on/off. from being unlocked using the lock but‐
tons or the door opener.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
signal tone volume. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
last, special settings. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 43, is
armed or disarmed.
▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions
and type of display.
Operating from the inside
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or Via the button for the central locking system.
after starting to drive.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Central locking system If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The concept
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
The central locking system becomes active come on.
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Tailgate.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside

▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and
front passenger doors.
35
Opening and closing: from Switching on interior lamps and

courtesy lamps
the outside
Press the button on the remote control
Using the remote control with the vehicle locked.
General information
Panic mode
Take the remote control with you You can trigger the alarm system if you find
People or animals left unattended in a yourself in a dangerous situation.
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
Press the button on the remote con‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
trol for at least 3 seconds.
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀ To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking Opening the tailgate

Press the button on the remote con‐ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol. trol for approx. 1 second.
The vehicle is unlocked. The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy was previously locked or unlocked.
lamps are switched on.
Note the opening height of the tailgate
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The tailgate pivots back and up when it
Create the settings, refer to page 42. opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
Convenient opening may result.◀
The remote control can be used to simultane‐ In some vehicle equipment variants, the tail‐
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof. gate can only be opened using the remote
Press and hold the button on the re‐ control if the vehicle has been unlocked.
mote control. Do not place the remote control in the
The windows and the glass sunroof open. cargo area
Releasing the button stops the motion. Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
Locking
the tailgate is closed.◀
Press the button on the remote control.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Locking from the outside
Provide edge protection
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ window while driving and damage the heating
edge.◀ wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐
tion.◀
36
Malfunction Using the door lock

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery General information
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Locking from the outside
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
erned by the following:
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
FCC ID: be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
▷ LX8766S. edge.◀
▷ LX8766E. The alarm system is triggered when the door is
▷ LX8CAS. opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
▷ LX8CAS2. lock.
▷ MYTCAS4. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle

with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
Compliance statement: tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC the remote control.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via
two conditions: the door lock.
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and Locking the doors and tailgate
▷ this device must accept any interference together
received, including interference that may To lock all doors and the tailgate at once:
cause undesired operation.
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to ing the button for the central locking sys‐
these devices could void the user's authority to tem in the interior.
operate this equipment.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
37
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the Adjusting the opening height
remote control. When adjusting the opening height, en‐
sure that there is a clearance of at least
Manual operation 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ ceiling may not be high enough for the open
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via tailgate if the load situation changes.◀
the door lock on the driver's door.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
Opening and closing: from 3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
the inside ing height is selected.
Locking and unlocking Opening

Note the opening height of the tailgate
The tailgate pivots back and up when it
opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance
when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage
may result.
Adjust the opening height of the tailgate ac‐
cording to the given situation.◀
The tailgate opens automatically to the ad‐

justed opening height.
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the
doors and the tailgate when the front doors are
closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening

▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐
rest or ▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on gate.
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it. ▷ Press the button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
▷ Push the button in the driver's
Tailgate footwell.
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐
Automatic tailgate operation tionary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked.
Adjusting the opening height Pressing the button again stops the motion.
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
The opening process is interrupted as well:
38
▷ When starting the engine.

▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
With Comfort Access, the tailgate opens with
no-touch activation, refer to page 41.
Provide edge protection ▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the tailgate.
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear
window while driving and damage the heating The tailgate closes automatically.
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.◀ tion.
▷ Press the button, arrow 2.
Closing Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐
The floor panel in the cargo area must be cle is locked.
closed, otherwise the tailgate cannot be
closed.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐

gate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
▷ Press the button on the inside of the tail‐
tion.
gate.
The tailgate closes automatically. The closing operation is interrupted:
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐ ▷ When starting the engine.
tion. ▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
With Comfort Access: Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
39
Do not place the remote control in the Comfort Access supports the following func‐
cargo area tions:
Take the remote control with you and do not ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ ▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Open tailgate with no-touch activation.
Manual operation ▷ Start the engine.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
Functional requirements
and smooth motion. ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
Do not operate the tailgate manually if it
is blocked ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐
ually as the tailgate may otherwise become ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
damaged and injury may result. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Contact your service center.◀ ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Emergency unlocking Comparison with ordinary remote

control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.

The tailgate is unlocked.
Comfort Access
The concept Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow 1.
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control. This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
40
Locking Opening tailgate with no-touch

activation
The tailgate can be opened with no-touch acti‐
vation using the remote control you are carry‐
ing.
A sensor detects a directed foot motion in the
center of the area at the rear of the car and the
tailgate opens.
Foot movement to be carried out

Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, Do not touch vehicle
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
With the foot motion, make sure there is
This corresponds to pressing the button steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
on the remote control. otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition hot exhaust system parts.◀
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
1. Position in the center behind the vehicle.
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle. 2. Move foot in the direction of travel under‐
neath the bumper and immediately back.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed and the rear spoiler is
retracted.
Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Opening
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
Unlocking the tailgate separately
was previously locked or unlocked.
Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐ Ensure that adequate clearance is available
ton on the remote control. before opening.
Do not place the remote control in the Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
cargo area tem flashes.
Take the remote control with you and do not Preventing inadvertent opening
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
In situations where the tailgate should
not be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car.
41
Otherwise, the tailgate may be opened inad‐ 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
vertently, for example by an unintentional or mation signals.
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it Automatic locking
experiences interference from external sour‐ The setting is stored for the remote control
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, currently in use.
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
etc. 1. "Settings"
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the 2. "Doors/key"
buttons on the remote control or use the 3. Select the desired function:
integrated key in the door lock. ▷ "Lock if no door opened"
If there is a malfunction, open the tailgate with The vehicle locks automatically after a
the remote control button or with the button on short period of time if a door is not
the tailgate. opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
Adjusting The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Unlocking
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use. The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
1. "Settings" rently in use.
2. "Doors/key" When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:" are automatically retrieved if this function was
4. Select the desired function: activated.
▷ "Driver's door only" Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler If this function is used, first make sure
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
locks the entire vehicle. empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
the country-specific variant, you can set ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
whether the doors are also unlocked with the ory is pressed.
button on the remote control.
Activating the setting
Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
42
Alarm system After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and

monitored again if the doors are locked. The
The concept hazard warning system flashes once.
The vehicle alarm system responds to: In some vehicle equipment variants, the tail‐
gate can only be opened using the remote
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
control if the vehicle was unlocked first.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ Panic mode
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the You can trigger the alarm system if you find
car. yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
Press the button on the remote con‐
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: trol for at least 3 seconds.
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem. Switching off the alarm
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol.
Arming and disarming the alarm
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
system
the remote control with you, pull on the
driver side or front passenger side door
General information
handle.
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
cess at the door lock, the alarm system is mirror
armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system

The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
the remote control.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The system is armed.
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
Press the button on the remote con‐ The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
trol for approx. 1 second. properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
With Comfort Access, the tailgate opens with
no-touch activation, refer to page 41.
43
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp Power windows

flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. General information
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
Take the remote control with you
ing:
Take the remote control with you when
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
until the engine ignition is switched on, but jure themselves.◀
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor

Opening
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The window opens while the switch is held.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
the following situations:
ance point.
▷ In automatic car washes.
The window opens automatically.
▷ In duplex garages.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
Convenient opening, refer to page 36, via the
sea or on a trailer.
remote control.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Closing
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make
Press the remote control button again
sure that the closing path of the window is
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
onds and then continues to flash.
point.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
The window closes while the switch is
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
held.
again.
44
The window closes without pinch protec‐

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance tion.
point.
The window closes automatically. Safety switch
Pressing the switch stops the motion. The safety switch in the driver's door can be
Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with used to prevent children, for example, from
Comfort Access. opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Pinch protection system
Switching on and off
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ Press the button.
rupted. The LED lights up if the safety func‐
The window reopens slightly. tion is switched on.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ Safety switch for rear operation
tection
Press the safety switch when transport‐
Even with the pinch protection system, check ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ result if the windows are closed without super‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain vision.◀
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the Panoramic glass sunroof
range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
Closing without the pinch protection operated together or separately, using the
system same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
Keep the closing path clear
tion is switched on.
sure that the closing path of the window is Keep the closing path clear
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
For example, if there is an external danger or if
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows: Take the remote control with you
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point Take the remote control with you when
and hold it there. leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
The pinch protection is limited and the ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
window reopens slightly if the closing force selves.◀
exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
45
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the

Tilting the glass sunroof remote control.
Push switch upward briefly. Convenient closing, refer to page 41, with
▷ The closed roof is tilted and Comfort Access.
the sliding visor opens
slightly. Comfort position
▷ The opened roof closes until Stops the roof in the comfort position if the
it is in its tilted position. The roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise
sliding visor stays com‐ in the passenger compartment.
pletely open. If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
Pinch protection system
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐ If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
ance point and hold it there. roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
The sliding visor moves the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
while the switch is being the tilted position during closing.
held.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐ Despite the pinch protection system, check
tion. that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
the closing action may not be interrupted in
certain extreme situations, such as when thin
Opening/closing the glass sunroof objects are present.◀
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐
scribed under Sliding visor. Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐

sistance point and hold.
46
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐

opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Closing from the raised position

without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the roof can only be operated
to a limited extent.
Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without
pinch protection.
Keep the closing path clear
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it

until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof and
sliding visor are completely
closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
47
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Manually adjustable seats
All standard, country-specific and optional At a glance

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital 1 Forward/backward
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
2 Thigh support
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with: 3 Seat tilt
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 51. 4 Backrest width
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 52. 5 Lumbar support
▷ Airbags, refer to page 95. 6 Height

7 Backrest tilt
Seats Forward/backward
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline direction.
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
accident. This would eliminate the protection properly.
normally provided by the belt.◀
48
Adjusting Controls
Height Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.
1 Seat and mirror memory
Backrest tilt 2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
function, refer to page 42, is activated for this
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
purpose.
Seat tilt Adjustments in detail

1. Forward/back.
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired

tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
49
Controls Adjusting
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
50
Adjusting Controls
Front seat heating If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐

nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐ Safety belts
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when Seats with safety belt
three LEDs are lit. The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ equipped with a safety belt.
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last. Number of safety belts
When ECO PRO, refer to page 175, is acti‐ Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety
vated, the heater output is reduced. belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
Switching off
Press the button longer. Hints
The LEDs go out. Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Rear seat heating Although airbags enhance safety by providing

added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
Switching on One person per safety belt
Press the button once for each tem‐ Never allow more than one person to
perature level. wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
The maximum temperature is reached when small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
three LEDs are lit.
51
Controls Adjusting
Putting on the belt speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can

Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly also be activated if objects are placed on the
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the front passenger seat.
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does Damage to safety belts
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
damage:
impact and injure the abdomen.
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or
checked.
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀
Checking and replacing safety belts
Reduction of restraining effect
Have the work performed only by your
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder that this safety feature will function properly.◀
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Head restraints in the front
Buckling the belt Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in Height

the belt buckle. Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Unbuckling the belt
Distance
1. Hold the belt firmly.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. is as close as possible to the back of the head.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel. If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that
the safety belts are positioned cor‐
rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at
52
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting the height
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
head restraint out completely.
push the head restraint down.
Before transporting passengers
Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
Three different tilt positions are available.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Rear head restraints

Folding down head restraints
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted
straint forward, arrow 1. headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
restraint folds as far back as possible.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,

and press down the head restraint.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
53
Controls Adjusting
Removing Storing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be 1. Switch on the ignition.
sitting in the seat in question. 2. Set the desired position.
Fold the seat down, refer to page 160, before
removing the head restraint, otherwise the 3. Press the button. The LED in the
head restraint cannot be removed. button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as
possible. Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐
head restraint out completely.
dent.◀
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ Comfort function
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ 1. Open the driver's door.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
2. Switch off the ignition.
able.◀
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
Seat and mirror memory
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
General information ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position

Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror deactivated
positions can be stored and retrieved for each After a brief period, the calling up of stored
remote control. Settings for the backrest width seat positions is deactivated to save battery
and lumbar support are not stored in memory. power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
54
Adjusting Controls
▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid. Adjusting electrically

▷ Press a button on the remote control. The setting corresponds to the direc‐
▷ Press the Start/Stop button. tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Mirrors
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 54
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting manually
At a glance If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor

When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
3 Fold in and out to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
General information
Deactivating
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer Fold in and out
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance Press the button.
to the traffic behind you based on what you
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
of an accident.◀
For example, this is advantageous
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
▷ In car washes.
mirror setting is stored for the remote control
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ ▷ In narrow streets.
mote control, the position is automatically re‐ ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
trieved if the setting for this function is active. away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
Selecting a mirror matically at a speed of approx.
To change over to the other mirror: 25 mph/40 km/h.
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
55
Controls Adjusting
Fold in the mirror in a car wash Interior rearview mirror, automatic

Before washing the car in an automatic dimming feature
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could The concept
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐ Photocells are used for control:
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 56. ▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect Functional requirement

For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by Do not adjust while driving
the interior mirror.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
56
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
57
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger side airbags, refer to page 97.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Note
ment is also described that is not available in a Deactivated front passenger airbags
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional If a child restraint fixing system is used in
equipment or country variant. This also applies the front passenger seat, the front passenger
for safety-related functions and systems. airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
The right place for children straint fixing system.◀
Note
Children in the vehicle Installing child restraint
Do not leave children unattended in the fixing systems
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Before mounting
doors.◀ Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Children should always be in the rear
Hints
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat. Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
Transporting children in the rear
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
Only transport children younger than
systems, observe the information provided by
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ Lock the rear seat backrests in position
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Before installing a child restraint system,
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a make sure that the rear seat backrests are
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not
fixing system can no longer be used, due to guaranteed and there is an increased risk of in‐
their age, weight and size.◀ jury for the child in the event of an accident.◀
Children on the front passenger seat On the front passenger seat

Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger Deactivating airbags
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side After installing a child restraint fixing system in
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐ the front passenger seat, make sure that the
58
Transporting children safely Controls
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐ Child seat security
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 97.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀ The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as Locking the safety belt
possible and adjust its height to the highest 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
position to obtain the best possible position for 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the with the belt.
event of an accident.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
Do not change the seat position and height af‐ pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
ter this. system. The safety belt is locked.
Backrest width Unlocking the safety belt

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐
pletely. Do not change the backrest width 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
again and do not call up a memory position. pletely.
Backrest width for the child seat

Before installing a child restraint fixing LATCH child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not
system
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
59
Controls Transporting children safely
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Child restraint fixing system with a
The lower anchors may be used to attach the tether strap
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child Mounting points
is restr- ained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ There are three mounting points for the upper
ing system, pull the belt away from the child retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing
restraint fixing system. systems.
With a through-loading system:

Position Note
Mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ Make sure that the upper retaining strap
cated behind the indicated covers. is not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing not properly secure the child restraint fixing
systems system in an accident.◀
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
60
Transporting children safely Controls
Locking the doors and

windows
Rear doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Seat backrest Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
6 Upper retaining strap The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point Safety switch for the rear
1. Raise the head restraint if necessary. Press the button on the driver's door if
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between children are being transported in the
the supports of the head restraint. rear.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between This locks various functions so that they can‐
the backrest and the cargo cover. not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
4. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to refer to page 45.
the mounting eyes.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
61
Controls Driving
Driving
Vehicle equipment ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
All standard, country-specific and optional started.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Start/Stop button Ignition off

Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
The concept
button again, but do not depress the brake.
Pressing the Start/Stop button
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/
switches the ignition on or off
Stop button again, and do not press on the
and starts the engine.
clutch pedal at the same time.
Automatic transmission: The
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
engine starts if the brake is de‐
out.
pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
Manual transmission: the engine starts if the
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop
electronic systems/power consumers.
button is pressed.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
Ignition on
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
button but do not depress the brake.
car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ is not switched off accidentally.◀
Stop button, and do not press on the clutch
pedal at the same time. The ignition automatically cuts off while the
vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
low beams are activated.
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths
of time. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
To save battery power when the engine is off,
started. This function is only available
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
when the low beams are switched off.
electronic systems/power consumers.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
The ignition switches off automatically:
the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low low beams are switched off.
beams are switched on.
62
Driving Controls
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if Repeated starting in quick succession
the driver's door is open and the low Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
beams are switched off. start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
When the ignition is switched off, by opening times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐
active. lytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Radio ready state
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
Activate radio ready state: moderate engine speeds.
▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button. Manual transmission
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation. Starting the engine
The radio ready state switches off automati‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal.
cally: 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. tral.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
tral locking system. The ignition is activated automatically for a
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
completely, so that the engine can still be gine starts.
started.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
Hints 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Enclosed areas The ignition is activated automatically for a
Do not let the engine run in enclosed certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes gine starts.
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic Engine stop
gas.◀
Hints
Unattended vehicle
Take the remote control with you
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
Take the remote control with you when
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
danger.
ple, cannot start the engine.◀
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐
mission in position P or neutral to prevent the
vehicle from moving.◀
63
Controls Driving
Set the parking brake and further secure Certain vehicle components may experience
the vehicle as required additional wear as a result of this system.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward Automatic mode
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering ter each engine start.
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ This function is activated at speeds faster than
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a Engine stop
car wash, heed the information regarding The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to ing a stop under the following conditions:
page 220. Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
Manual transmission
not pressed.
Switching off the engine ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button. Automatic transmission:
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
tion D.
3. Set the parking brake.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
Automatic transmission vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
Switching off the engine er's door is closed.
1. Engage transmission position P with the The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced
vehicle stopped. when the engine is switched off.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The radio ready state is switched on. The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
3. Set the parking brake.
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop

The display indicates that the
Function conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been satis‐
The concept
fied.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic Note
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
The engine is not switched off automatically in
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
64
Driving Controls
▷ External temperature too low. The engine can only be started via the Start/
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Stop button.
matic climate control is running.
Note
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet
been heated or cooled to the required Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
level. activated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature. ▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
partment when the cooling function is
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
switched on.
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
position is changed from P to N, D, R or
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. M/S.
▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐ matic climate control is switched on.
tion N or M/S. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. ▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
partment when the heating is switched on.
Starting the engine ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐
lowing conditions: pressed a number of times in succession.
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed. Activating/deactivating the system
manually
▷ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal. Using the button
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying Press the button.
lengths of time.
65
Controls Driving
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is The indicator lamp lights up red. The
deactivated. parking brake is set.
The engine is started during an automatic Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
engine stop. models
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button. Releasing
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is

switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
is deactivated. the lever down.
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically. Hints
2. Set the parking brake. Use while driving
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. If on a rare occasion it is necessary to
use the parking brake while driving, do not use
Automatic deactivation excessive force when applying it. When using
it, keep the button on the lever depressed.
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be ing the parking brake may cause the rear
absent. wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
To prevent corrosion and braking control on

Malfunction one side only, lightly apply the parking brake
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions
switches of the engine automatically. A Check permit.
Control message is displayed. It is possible to The brake lamps will not light up if the parking
continue driving. Have the system checked. brake is engaged.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
66
Driving Controls
Turn signal, high beams, High beams, headlamp flasher

headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
Do not fold in the exterior mirror while
driving and when the turn signals/warning
flashers are working, or else the additional
flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐
ger be in the prescribed position and will be
difficult to see.◀ ▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Using turn signals
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. may be damaged.◀
To switch off manually, press the lever to the
No wiper operation on dry windshield
resistance point.
Do not use the windshield wipers if the
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp windshield is dry, as this may damage the
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. wiper blades or cause them to become worn
more quickly.◀
Triple turn signal activation
No wiper operation with wipers folded
Press the lever to the resistance point.
away
The turn signal flashes three times.
Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
The function can be activated or deactivated: away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
1. "Settings" damaged.◀
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
67
Controls Driving
Switching on Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Press the wiper levers up.
Activating/deactivating
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Switching off and brief wipe The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐
ing operation is started. At temperatures below
32 ℉/0 ℃, a wiping operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Press the wiper levers down.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
68
Driving Controls
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Fold-out position of the wipers

the rain sensor Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Turn the thumbwheel.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly. Washer fluid
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ General information
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on. Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
Do not use the washer system at freezing
injury if it is used incorrectly.
temperatures
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
tion.
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this Only keep it in the closed original container
reason, use antifreeze. and inaccessible to children.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
empty; otherwise, you could damage the tainer.
pump.◀ United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
Windshield washer nozzles states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
69
Controls Driving
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ Manual transmission

centrate or the equivalent.◀
Shifting
Washer fluid reservoir Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
Adding washer fluid When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
Only add washer fluid when the engine is the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
cool, and then close the cover completely to vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
avoid contact between the washer fluid and lead to engine damage.◀
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk Reverse gear
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left,
a slight resistance needs to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with

Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir. Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
R is Reverse
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations. Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
N is Neutral
the correct mixing ratio.
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
vehicle can roll.
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system. When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 62, position P is engaged automatically.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can
P Park
result in clogging of the windshield washer
nozzles. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 63, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 62, and when position R
or D is engaged.
70
Driving Controls
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐ After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
gaged. its center position.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to
roll.
Kickdown
Press unlock button, in order to:
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond ▷ Engage R.
the resistance point at the full throttle position. ▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging the transmission position

Engaging P
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Press button P.
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
Sport program and manual mode
ready to start.◀
Activating the sport program
Engaging D, R and N
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ mission position D.
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
71
Controls Driving
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
vated.
Shift paddles
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1. The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
manual mode is automatically upshifted as hands on the steering wheel.
needed. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
Switching to manual mode transmission temporarily switches to manual
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ mode.
ward. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
wards. tem switches back into automatic mode if the
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine selector lever is in transmission position D.
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
sible if the engine speed is too high. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐ The transmission position is dis‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met: played, e.g.: P.
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
Sport automatic transmission: launch
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. Control
Ending the sport program/manual The concept
mode
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
Push the selector lever to the right. on surfaces with good traction.
72
Driving Controls
Hints
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Did not use Launch Control during the break-

in, refer to page 168, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the

Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engaging the transmission position S
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press on the accelerator beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
A flag symbol appears in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
73
Controls Displays
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 79 5 Engine oil temperature 79

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 81
3 Indicator/warning lamps 77 7 Electronic displays 76
4 Tachometer 79 8 Display/reset miles 80
74
Displays Controls
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Fuel gauge 79 5 Engine oil temperature 79

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 81
3 Indicator/warning lamps 77 7 Electronic displays 76
4 Tachometer 79 8 Display/reset miles 80
75
Controls Displays
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 77 Miles/trip miles 80

Time 80 Computer 85
Date 80 2 Transmission display 72
External temperature 80 Gear shift indicator 82
Selection lists 85 3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control 120
Service requirements 81
76
Displays Controls
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time 80 Navigation display, see user's manual for

External temperature 80 Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Date 80
2 Energy recovery 81
Selection list, e.g., radio 85
Transmission display 72
Speed limit detection 83
Current fuel consumption 81
Computer 85
ECO PRO 175
Miles/trip miles 80
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 77
Service requirements 81
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output

and a text message may appear on the Control
The concept Display.
The Check Control system monitors functions
Indicator/warning lamps
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems. The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
A Check Control message is displayed as a
nations and colors.
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in Several of the lamps are checked for proper
the Head-up Display. functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
77
Controls Displays
Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system
Symbol Function or system Safety belts.
Turn signal.
Airbag system.
Front fog lamps.

Steering system.
Rear fog lamp.

Engine functions.
High beams.
Parking brake.
Brake system.
High-beam Assistant.
In Canadian models
Parking brake.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System.

Active Cruise Control.
ABS Antilock Brake System in

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Canadian models.
Control: collision warning.
At least one Check Control mes‐
Speed limit, adjustable. sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐
bol in display).
Cruise control.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
Lane departure warning. in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is a fault or the required action, can be called up
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐ via Check Control.
tion Control is activated.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
Tire Pressure Monitor. automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Flat Tire Monitor.
78
Displays Controls
Symbols 3. "Check Control"

Depending on the Check Control message, the 4. Select the text message.
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual" Messages after trip completion
Display additional information about the Special messages that are displayed during
Check Control message in the Integrated driving are displayed again after the ignition is
Owner's Manual. switched off.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner. Fuel gauge
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
The vehicle inclination may
Contact Roadside Assistance. cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
Hiding Check Control messages
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
Press the computer button on the turn signal rupted to protect the engine.
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared
Engine oil temperature
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ the low temperature end.
sages are displayed consecutively. Drive at moderate engine
These messages can be hidden for approx. and vehicle speeds.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
played again automatically. ture: the pointer is in the
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden middle or in the left half of
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. the temperature display.
They are stored and can be displayed ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
again later. perature end. A Check Control message is
also displayed.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
79
Controls Displays
Coolant temperature Time

If the coolant along with the engine becomes The time is displayed at the bot‐
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. tom of the instrument cluster.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 200. Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 87.
Odometer and trip odometer

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
Date
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 88.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob. Range
▷ When the ignition is After the reserve range is
switched off, the time, the reached:
external temperature and
▷ A Check Control message is
the odometer are displayed.
displayed briefly.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
▷ The remaining range is
odometer is reset.
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
External temperature as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
External temperature warning
The Check Control message appears continu‐
If the indicator drops to
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds. Refuel promptly
A Check Control message is Refuel no later than at a range of
displayed. 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
There is the increased danger of ice. not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Ice on roads Displaying the cruising range

Even at temperatures above 1. "Settings"
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on 2. "Info display"
roads.
3. "Additional indicators"
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
ter.
creased risk of an accident.◀
80
Displays Controls
Current fuel consumption The current service requirements can be read

out from the remote control by the service
Instrument cluster specialist.
Displays the current fuel con‐ Display

sumption. You can check
Data regarding the service status or legally
whether you are currently driv‐
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
matically transmitted to your service center
mentally-friendly manner.
before a service due date.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Instrument cluster

features
Display in the instrument clus‐
Displays the current fuel con‐ ter.
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
mentally-friendly manner.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
Displaying the current fuel features
consumption Display in the instrument cluster
1. "Settings" with expanded scope.
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
Energy recovery quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy 1. "Vehicle Info"
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced. 3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
Service requirements
tion.
The concept
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly af‐
ter the ignition is switched on.
81
Controls Displays
Symbols Service history

Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐
Symbols Description ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data.
No service is currently re‐ The entries are like a service booklet of the
quired. documentation of regular maintenance.
The entered maintenance work can be dis‐
The deadline for service or a played on the Control Display. Function is
legally mandated inspection is available as soon as a maintenance operation
approaching. has been entered in the vehicle data.
The service deadline has al‐ 1. "Vehicle Info"

ready passed. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Entering appointment dates 4. "Service history"
Enter the dates for the required inspections. Performed maintenance operations are
displayed.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly. 5. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" Symbols
3. "Service required"
Symbols Description
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:" Green: maintenance was per‐
formed on schedule.
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm. Yellow: maintenance was per‐
The entered date is stored. formed late.
Automatic Service Request Maintenance was not per‐

Data regarding the service status or legally formed.
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center
before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
Gear shift indicator
notified.
The concept
1. "Vehicle Info" The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
2. "Vehicle status" cient gear in the current driving situation.
3. Open "Options". Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and
4. "Last Service Request" the country-specific version of the vehicle, the
gear shift indicator is active in the manual
mode of the automatic transmission and in the
manual transmission.
82
Displays Controls
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
the instrument cluster. detected and compared with vehicle interior
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
engaged gear is displayed. played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
Manual transmission: displays the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Symbol Description
No Passing Information
Fuel efficient gear is engaged. No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
ter displays the beginnings and ends of no
passing zones detected by the camera. The
Shift up to fuel efficient gear. system accounts for only the beginnings and
ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are
primarily identified with road markings.
Shift into neutral. ▷ On routes without signage.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no
signage is present, but passing would not
Automatic transmission: displays
be permitted.
Example Description
Hints
Fuel efficient gear is engaged. Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
Shift into fuel efficient gear. for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
Speed limit detection with

The concept
Speed limit detection

Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
detected speed limit. The camera at the base
of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
83
Controls Displays
At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.
Camera
▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed

in the Head-up Display.
The camera is located near the base of the System limits

mirror. The system may not be fully functional and
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Switching on/off ▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
1. "Settings" ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
2. "Info display" front of you.
3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can ▷ When the windshield behind the interior
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ment cluster via the onboard computer. No ered by a sticker, etc.
Passing Information is displayed together with ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
the activated speed limit information. camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
Display system are incorrect.
The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
cluster. tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
Speed limit detection
such as due to changes in the road net‐
Current speed limit. work.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Speed limit detection is not
ately after vehicle shipment.
available.
84
Displays Controls
Selection lists in the Activating a list and creating the

setting
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
ment cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
Control are displayed. list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
Display ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
wheel.
Instrument cluster
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on‐
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument cluster with enhanced

features Calling up information on the info
display
Press the onboard computer button on the

turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of
the instrument cluster.
85
Controls Displays
Information at a glance If there is only enough fuel left for less than
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
signal lever calls up the following information changes.
on the info display:
Average fuel consumption
▷ Range.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Average fuel consumption.
the period during which the engine is running.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Average speed. the distance traveled since the last reset by the
▷ Date. onboard computer.
▷ Speed limit detection.
Average speed
▷ Time of arrival.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
When destination guidance is activated in engine manually stopped do not enter into the
the navigation system. calculation of the average speed.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in Resetting average values
the navigation system. Press and hold the computer button on the
▷ Arrow view of navigation system. turn signal lever.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
play is inactive.
gation system before the trip is started.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐ Time of arrival
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster. The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
1. "Settings" tered in the navigation system
2. "Info display" before the trip is started.
3. Select the desired displays. The time must be correctly set.
Information in detail Speed limit detection

Description of the speed limit detection, refer
Range
to page 83, function.
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Speed limit
It is calculated based on your driving style over Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
the last 20 miles/30 km. should cause a warning to be issued.
86
Displays Controls
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed "Automatically reset": all values are reset
drops below the set speed limit once by at approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
least 3 mph/5 km/h. a standstill.
Displaying, setting or changing the Display on the Control Display

limit Display the onboard computer or trip computer
1. "Settings" on the Control Display.
2. "Speed" 1. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Warning at:" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed. Resetting the fuel consumption or
5. Press the controller. speed
The speed limit is stored. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
Activating/deactivating the limit 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
1. "Settings" 4. "Yes"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller. Sport displays
In the Control Display, the current values for
Setting your current speed as the limit power and torque can be displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed" Displaying sport displays in the
Control Display
3. "Select current speed"
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Sport displays"
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Trip computer
Settings on the Control
The vehicle features two types of computer.
Display
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as Time
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an Setting the time zone
overview of the current trip. 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Resetting the trip computer
3. "Time zone"
1. "Vehicle Info"
4. Select the desired time zone.
2. "Trip computer"
The time zone is stored.
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
87
Controls Displays
Setting the time Language

1. "Settings"
Setting the language
2. "Time/Date"
To set the language on the Control Display:
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 1. "Settings"
are displayed. 2. "Language/Units"
5. Press the controller. 3. "Language:"
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ 4. Select the desired language.
nutes are displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control
7. Press the controller. currently in use.
The time is stored.
Setting the voice dialog
Setting the time format Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
1. "Settings" refer to page 25.
2. "Time/Date"
Units of measure
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format. Setting the units of measure
The time format is stored. To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
Date 1. "Settings"
Setting the date 2. "Language/Units"
1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired menu item.
2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired unit.
3. "Date:" The setting is stored for the remote control

currently in use.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Brightness
6. Make the necessary settings for the month Setting the brightness
and year. To set the brightness of the Control Display:
The date is stored.
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format 2. "Control display"
1. "Settings" 3. "Brightness"
2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
currently in use.
88
Displays Controls
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐

ness control may not be clearly visible.
Assist system information
Display on the Control Display

Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info"
89
Controls Lamps
Lamps
Vehicle equipment If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
All standard, country-specific and optional cally switched off at these switch settings.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
for safety-related functions and systems. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
At a glance
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 91.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
1 Rear fog lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
2 Front fog lamps lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive locked.
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings"
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting"
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam 3. "Welcome lights"
Assistant The setting is stored for the remote control
7 Instrument lighting currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature

Parking lamps/low beams, The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐
headlamp control tion is switched off.
General information
Setting the duration
Switch position: 0, ,
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
90
Lamps Controls
3. "Pathway lighting:" Roadside parking lamps

4. Set the duration.
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control

Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on
The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever
lamps are switched on. either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot Switching off
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
ment in determining when the lamps should be the opposite direction.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Adaptive Light Control
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually The concept
under these conditions.◀
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
Daytime running lights tion of the road surface.
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or . rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
After the ignition is switched off, the parking the course of the road.
lamps light up in position .
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is
Activating/deactivating switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
In some countries, daytime running lights are inside of the curve is better lighted.
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights. Activating
1. "Settings" Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
2. "Lighting"
The turning lamps are automatically switched
3. "Daytime running lamps"
on depending on the steering angle or the use
The setting is stored for the remote control of turn signals.
currently in use.
91
Controls Lamps
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ The indicator lamp in the instrument
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ cluster lights up.
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
is active.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Malfunction traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
failed. Have the system checked as soon as ment cluster lights up when the system
possible. switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
High-beam Assistant
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on Switching the high beams on and off
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that manually
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐
fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual.
Activating
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off

when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant can be activated Personal responsibility
when the low beams are switched on.
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
1. Turn the light switch to or . a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
arrow. manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
92
Lamps Controls
The system is not fully functional in situations If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
such as the following, and driver intervention page 91, is activated, the low beams will come
may be necessary: on automatically when you switch on the front
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, fog lamps.
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Instrument lighting
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings. Adjusting
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ The parking lamps or low beams
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ must be switched on to adjust
coming traffic on freeways. the brightness.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the Adjust the brightness using the
presence of highly reflective signs. thumbwheel.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ Interior lamps
ered with stickers, etc.
General information
Camera The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
The camera is located near the base of the

mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
1 Interior lamps
Fog lamps 2 Reading lamp
Front fog lamps Switching the interior lamps on and

The parking lamps or low beams must be off
switched on.
Press the button.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
93
Controls Lamps
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
If the color scheme of the line is selected and
the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome
lamps are displayed in the color of the line
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting but also independently of it.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
94
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
95
Controls Safety
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers,
collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
gered. and after triggering of the airbags
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐
jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
your service center or a workshop that has the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
sives.
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
which could result in injury.◀
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors.
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats Functional readiness of the airbag
with integrated side airbags. system
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as When the ignition is switch on, the
jackets, over the backrests. warning lamp in the instrument cluster
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads lights up briefly and thereby indicates
away from the side airbag and do not rest the operational readiness of the entire airbag
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries system and the belt tensioner.
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
them in any way.
96
Safety Controls
When there is a malfunction, have the ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
airbag system checked immediately or other items to the front passenger seat
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag unless they are specifically recommended
system checked immediately; otherwise, there by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
is a risk that the system does not function as ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
expected in the event of an accident despite passenger seat if a child restraint system is
corresponding severity of the accident.◀ to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Automatic deactivation of the front could press against the seat from below.
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐ Indicator lamp for the front passenger
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ airbags
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
Child restraint fixing system in the front bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger seat passenger airbags.
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ tivated or deactivated.
structions under Children on the front passen‐
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
ger seat.◀
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
Malfunction of the automatic ing system intended for that
deactivation system purpose is detected on the
When transporting older children and adults, seat or the seat is empty.
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ The airbags on the front
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, passenger side are not acti‐
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ vated.
bags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
In this case, change the sitting position so that for example, a correctly seated person of
the front passenger airbags are activated and sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
the indicator lamp goes out. airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have tivated.
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
97
Controls Safety
Detected child seats Active pedestrian protection

The system generally detects children seated system
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was The concept
manufactured. After installing a child seat,
With the active pedestrian protection system,
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front
the hood is tilted in the event of a collision be‐
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
tween the front of the vehicle and a pedestrian.
that the child seat has been detected and the
Sensors under the bumper are used for detec‐
front passenger airbags are not activated.
tion. This system increases the amount of de‐
formation space available under the active
Strength of the driver's and front hood for the subsequent head impact.
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front Do not touch individual components
passenger airbags are triggered depends on Do not touch the actuators of the hinges
the position of the driver's and front passenger or hood locks; otherwise, there is the danger of
seats. accidentally deploying the system and causing
To maintain the accuracy of this function over injury.◀
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐ System limits
trol Display. The active hood is only deployed at speeds
between approx. 12 mph/20 km/h and
Calibrating the front seats 34 mph/55 km/h.
A corresponding message appears on the In rare cases, the system may deploy for safety
Control Display. reasons when a collision with a pedestrian can‐
1. Move the respective seat forward all the not be ruled out completely, for instance:
way. ▷ In case of a collision with a drum or road
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It delineator.
moves forward briefly. ▷ In case of a collision with an animal.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. ▷ In the event of stone impacts.
The calibration procedure is completed when ▷ When driving through a snow drift.
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears. Deployed pedestrian protection
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ system
peat the calibration. After deployment or damage
If the message does not disappear after a re‐ After deployment of the active hood or in
peat calibration, have the system checked as the event of damage, have the system checked
soon as possible. and replaced.
Unobstructed area of movement Have this work performed only by your service
Ensure that the area of movement of the center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury this safety feature will function properly.◀
or damage to objects.◀
98
Safety Controls
Malfunction Hints
A Check Control message is displayed. Tire damage due to external factors
The system was deployed or is mal‐ Sudden tire damage caused by external
functioning. influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
Immediately drive at moderate speeds to the Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
nearest service center and have the system cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
checked and repaired. page 185, as well when using the system.
Do not open the hood

Do not open the hood after the warning The system must have been reset with the
lamp appears; otherwise, damage may occur.◀ correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
Hints sured.
Do not remove/modify the system Reset the system again after each correction
Do not remove or modify the system in of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
any way. or wheel change.
Do not modify the individual components of Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
the system or its wiring in any way.◀ ensure that the system will operate properly.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation Status display

or after deployment The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
mantled and the system scrapped by your play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
service center. Non-professional attempts to
1. "Vehicle Info"
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired triggering of the air‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
bag, either of which could result in injury.◀ 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Status display

The tire and system status is indicated by the
The concept color of the wheels and a text message on the
The system monitors tire pressure in the four Control Display.
mounted tires. The system warns you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more All wheels green
tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
valves measure the tire pressure and tire tem‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
perature. the last reset.
One wheel is yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
99
Controls Safety
All wheels are yellow based on the tire pressures before the last
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in reset.
several tires.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
Wheels, gray vers.
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
for this may be:
regular tires or run-flat tires.
▷ The system is being reset.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are la‐
▷ Malfunction. beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
Carry out reset
Do not continue driving without run-flat
Reset the system after each correction of the tires
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
1. "Vehicle Info" may result in serious accidents.◀
2. "Vehicle status" When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
3. "Perform reset" DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. if necessary.
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".
Actions in the event of a flat tire
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is Normal tires
displayed. 1. Identify the damaged tire.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Do this by checking the air pressure in all
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are four tires.
accepted as reference values. The reset is
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
completed automatically during driving.
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
After a successfully completed Reset, the carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In
wheels on the Control Display are shown in that case, carry out a reset.
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
If an identification is not possible, please
active" is displayed.
contact the service center.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
2. Rectify the flat tire.
drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
cally. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐
Low tire pressure message tronics. In this case, have the electronics
checked at the next opportunity and have
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A them replaced if necessary.
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
100
Safety Controls
Run-flat tires A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a

change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
Maximum speed duced lane stability during braking, a longer
You can continue driving with a damaged tire braking distance and altered self-steering
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. properties.◀
Final tire failure

Continued driving with a flat tire
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
vers. could come loose and cause an accident. Do
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
Required inflation pressure check
message
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In A Check Control message is displayed.
that case, carry out a reset. Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
Possible driving distance with complete loss of a reset of the system.
tire inflation pressure: In some cases, a wheel was changed without
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire having carried out a reset.
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions. System limits
For a vehicle containing an average load, the The system does not function properly if a re‐
possible driving distance is approx. set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
50 miles/80 km. reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
sures are correct.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ The tire pressure depends on the temperature
duced lane stability during braking, a longer of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
braking distance, and altered self-steering due to driving or because of the heat of the
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. temperature falls again. This behavior may
cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
Because the possible driving distance de‐ fall very sharply.
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
Malfunction
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load, The yellow warning lamp flashes and
etc. then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
Continued driving with a flat tire tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Display in the following situations:
101
Controls Safety
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
have the service center check it if neces‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure
sary. telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
your service center. minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again.
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with is illuminated, the system may not be able to
the same radio frequency: after leaving the detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
matically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
flated to the inflation pressure recommended to continue to function properly.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the The concept
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system does not measure the actual infla‐
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has tion pressure in the tires.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
while moving.
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
should stop and check your tires as soon as and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated reported as a flat tire.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ Functional requirements
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
even if under-inflation has not reached the every tire or wheel change.
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
102
Safety Controls
Status display Do not continue driving without run-flat

The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can tires
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
whether or not the FTM is active. equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed. System limits
Sudden tire damage
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ Sudden serious tire damage caused by
tion tire pressures as reference values for the external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by vance.◀
confirming the inflation pressures. A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
Do not initialize the system when driving with cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
snow chains. inflation pressure regularly.
1. "Vehicle Info" The system could be delayed or malfunction in

2. "Vehicle status"
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
3. "Perform reset"
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. surface.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
6. Drive away. wheels, high lateral acceleration.
The initialization is completed while driving, ▷ When driving with snow chains.
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when Actions in the event of a flat tire
driving resumes.
Normal tires
Indication of a flat tire 1. Identify the damaged tire.
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Do this by checking the air pressure in all
Check Control message is displayed. four tires.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
inflation pressure. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. the system.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
If an identification is not possible, please
vers.
contact the service center.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
2. Rectify the flat tire.
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
103
Controls Safety
Run-flat tires A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a

change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
Maximum speed duced lane stability during braking, a longer
You can continue driving with a damaged tire braking distance and altered self-steering
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. properties.◀
Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
vers. could come loose and cause an accident. Do
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. not continue driving, and contact your service
center.◀
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Intelligent Safety
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
The concept
the system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
tire inflation pressure:
following systems, which can help to avoid an
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire imminent collision. These systems are active
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load automatically every time the engine is started
and the driving style and conditions. using the Start/Stop button:
For a vehicle containing an average load, the ▷ Collision warning, refer to page 105.
possible driving distance is approx.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 109.
50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, Note
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer Personal responsibility
braking distance, and altered self-steering The system does not serve as a substi‐
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ traffic situation.
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
Because the possible driving distance de‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
pends on how the vehicle is used during the accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
104
Safety Controls
At a glance Collision warning with City

Button in the vehicle
Braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
Intelligent Safety button
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
Switching on/off The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after each engine start via the start/ When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
stop button. to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
General information
Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
The LED lights up.
danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
Settings can be made on the Control Display. above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
warnings may vary depending on the current
driving situation.
Collision warning Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
vention occurs when appropriate.
Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of Detection range
the two systems:
▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 105;
▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 107
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling

in the same direction of movement if they are
105
Controls Safety
located within the detection range of the sys‐ Symbol Measure

tem.
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing.
At a glance
Increase braking and distance.
Button in the vehicle The vehicle flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
Intelligent Safety button braking force is used, even with light pressure
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk
of collision, the system can assist with a slight
Switching on/off braking intervention. The intervention can
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a
Switching on automatically complete stop.
The system is automatically active every time Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ vention up until reaching a complete stop, the
ton. engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
Switching off
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
The system is only switched off until the next and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop vated.
button.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Press the button. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
The LED goes out. ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
switch off the collision warning with braking
Warning with braking function
function to prevent undesired interventions.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver System limits
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving Be alert
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
Display improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ger of an accident occurring.◀
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
106
Safety Controls
Detection range Collision warning with

The system's detection capabilities are limited. braking function
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late. The concept
For example, the following situations may not The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
be detected: nent danger of a collision and also includes a
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach braking function.
them at high speed. If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
you or sharply decelerating vehicles. controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. control has been deactivated.
▷ Pedestrians. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
Functional limitations avoid false warnings.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations: General information
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
fall. possible danger of collision with vehicles at
▷ In tight curves. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time
of these warnings may vary depending on the
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
current driving situation.
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
Detection range
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this It responds to stationary or moving objects
may result in increased false warnings. that are within the detection range of the radar
system.
107
Controls Safety
At a glance The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐

vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is
Button in the vehicle accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
Intelligent Safety button intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
Switching on/off
The warning does not relieve the driver
Switching on automatically of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ The braking intervention can be interrupted by
ton. pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
Switching off When towing or tow-starting the vehicle,
The system is only switched off until the next switch off the collision warning with braking
time the engine is started with the Start/Stop function to prevent undesired interventions.
button.
Press the button. Display in the instrument cluster
The LED goes out. The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
acoustically.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
108
Safety Controls
Warning stages Functional limitations

Symbol Measure following situations:
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
ing. fall.
Increase distance. ▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
The vehicle flashes red and an
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
OFF.
ing.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
braking or making an evasive ma‐
neuver. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Adapting your speed and driving style ▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
The display does not relieve the driver of
low in the sky.
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this
System limits
may result in increased false warnings.
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or Pedestrian warning with city
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and braking function
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
ger of an accident occurring.◀ The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents with
Detection range pedestrians.
The system's detection capabilities are limited. The system issues a warning in the city driving
This may result in the warning not being is‐ speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
sued or being issued late. lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected: The system is controlled via the camera in the
base of the interior mirror.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
General information
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
The system issues a warning with brightness
you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. collision with pedestrians and assists with a
▷ Pedestrians. brake intervention shortly before a collision.
109
Controls Safety
It responds to persons that are within the de‐ Camera

tection range of the system.
Detection range
The camera is located near the base of the

mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
The warning area in front of the vehicle is div‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
ided into two areas.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
Switching on/off
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Switching on automatically
left.
The system is automatically active every time
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ ton.
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in Switching off
the direction of the central area.
Press the button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
At a glance Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function

The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
Intelligent Safety button is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
110
Safety Controls
Intervene immediately by braking or making an ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Braking intervention ▷ Pedestrians below a body size of approx.
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ 32 in/80 cm.
tervene. During the warning, the maximum
braking force is used, even with light pressure Functional limitations
on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk The system may not be fully functional or may
of collision, the system can assist with a slight not be available in the following situations:
braking intervention. The intervention can ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a fall.
complete stop.
▷ In tight curves.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up until reaching a complete stop, the ▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
engine may be shut down. shield are dirty or covered.
The braking intervention is executed only if ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
vated. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
The braking intervention can be interrupted by ately after vehicle shipment.
pressing on the accelerator or by actively mov‐
ing the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, Lane departure warning
switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent
undesired interventions. The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
System limits you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. Depending
Be alert
on the country-specific version of the vehicle,
Due to system limitations, warnings may the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or 45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and below this speed, a message appears in the in‐
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ strument cluster.
ger of an accident occurring.◀
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
Detection range may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐ uation.
ited. The system does not provide a warning if the
This may result in the warning not being is‐ turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
sued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not
be detected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
111
Controls Safety
Notes ▷ On: the LED lights up.

Personal responsibility ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system cannot serve as a substitute The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
for the driver's personal judgment of the rently in use.
course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
Display in the instrument cluster
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ ▷ Lines: system is activated.
cle.◀ ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
At a glance issued.

Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
Lane departure warning
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
Camera ▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
The camera is located near the base of the ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
mirror. ice, dirt or water.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
Switching on/off ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Press the button.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
112
Safety Controls
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior At a glance

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc. Button in the vehicle
Active Blind Spot Detection

The concept
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper

monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights The radar sensors are located under the rear
up dimly. bumper.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ Switching on/off
uations described above. Press the button.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. ▷ On: the LED lights up.
Notes
The system can issue warnings at speeds
Personal responsibility above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h
The system does not serve as a substi‐ The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the rently in use.
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
113
Controls Safety
Display ▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Information stage Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning Brake force display

If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
The concept
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
brake lamps light up.
much faster than your own.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
Active Protection
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional. General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
For US owners only of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ Attentiveness assistant.
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ ▷ PreCrash
erned by the following: ▷ PostCrash
FCC ID:
114
Safety Controls
Attentiveness assistant After a break, another recommendation to take

a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
The concept mately 45 minutes.
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ System limits
notonous journeys, for example, on highways. The function may be limited in the following
In this situation, it is recommended that the situations, for instance, and will either output
driver take a break. an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Note
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
Personal responsibility about 43 mph/70 km/h.
The system cannot act as a substitute for ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
the personal assessment of one's physical rapid acceleration or when cornering
state and may not detect an increasing lack of quickly.
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently.
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor.
result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function PreCrash
The system is activated each time the engine
The concept
is started and cannot be switched off.
With this system critical driving situations that
After travel has begun, the system is trained might result in an accident can be detected
about the driver, so that increasing lack of above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In
alertness or fatigue can be detected. these situations, preventative protection
This procedure takes the following criteria into measures are automatically undertaken to
account: minimize the risk in the event of an accident as
▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐ much as possible.
ing behavior. Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of ▷ Full brake applications.
trip. ▷ Severe understeering.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the ▷ Severe oversteering.
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break. If the vehicle includes the collision warning or
collision warning with braking feature, impend‐
ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or
Break recommendation
stopped in front of you can also be detected
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or within the system's range.
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
115
Controls Safety
Note
The system cannot possibly serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
the traffic situation. The system may not al‐
ways detect critical situations reliably and in a
timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation
and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may
result.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also
interrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
116
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
All standard, country-specific and optional speed and by applying brakes at individual
equipment that is offered in the model series is wheels.
ment is also described that is not available in a Adjust your driving style to the situation
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional An appropriate driving style is always the
equipment or country variant. This also applies responsibility of the driver.
for safety-related functions and systems. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
Antilock Brake System ABS margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Indicator/warning lamps
The vehicle remains steerable even during full The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
brake applications, thus increasing active trols the drive forces and brake forces.
safety.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ failed.
gine.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Brake assistant When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system in bends.
automatically produces the maximum braking
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
again as soon as possible.
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS. Deactivating DSC
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
for the duration of the full braking. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
DSC Dynamic Stability The DSC system is switched off.
Control
Activating DSC
The concept
Press the button.
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
lamp go out.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
117
Controls Driving stability control systems
Indicator/warning lamps Deactivating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ Press the button again.
played in the instrument cluster.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is tor lamp go out.
deactivated.
xDrive
DTC Dynamic Traction xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
Control hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The concept The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
which forward momentum is optimized. axles as demanded by the driving situation and
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ road surface.
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
ited. Dynamic Damping Control
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
The concept
ate caution.
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
under the following special circumstances:
eling on uneven road surfaces.
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
The system enhances driving dynamics and
snow-covered roads.
comfort as required for the road surface and
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in driving style.
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains. Programs
The system offers several different programs.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
The programs can be selected via the Driving
Traction Control
Dynamics Control, refer to page 120.
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
provides maximum traction on loose ground. SPORT
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
and when driving in bends.
sorbers for greater driving agility.
Activating DTC
SPORT+
Press the button. Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC with limited driving stabilization.
OFF lights up.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
118
Variable sport steering At a glance
The variable sport steering increases the Activate manual/ automatic mode
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
Press the button.

Active rear spoiler
The concept ▷ LED on: manual mode.
The active rear spoiler increases driving stabil‐ ▷ LED off: automatic mode.
ity. It extends and retracts automatically de‐ The selected operating mode is retained even
pending on the driving speed. after the ignition has been switched off.
Hints Automatic mode

Keep the movement area unobstructed A retracted rear spoiler is in automatic mode
when the engine is started. The system may
Keep the movement area of the rear
be initialized during driving, and if this happens
spoiler free from obstructions such as icing,
the rear spoiler moves slightly.
otherwise it may be damaged.◀
Do not take hold of the rear spoiler to Automatic extension

push the vehicle When traveling faster than 65 mph/110 km/h.
Do not use the rear spoiler to push the vehicle,
as this may damage the vehicle or lead to inju‐ Automatic retraction
ries.◀ When slowing to a speed below
45 mph/70 km/h.
Follow the instructions for car-wash systems,
refer to page 220, and Care instructions, refer
to page 222. Note
Rear spoilers cannot be retracted manually
when traveling at speeds above
65 mph/110 km/h.
Manual mode
Manual mode can be used for example for
cleaning the rear spoiler with the ignition
switched on or the engine running.
119
Keep the movement area unobstructed Driving Dynamics Control

Keep the movement area of the rear
spoiler free from icing, for example, otherwise The concept
injuries may occur.◀ The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.
Extending the rear spoiler Various programs can be selected for this pur‐
pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the
Press the button.
DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate
a program.
The LED lights up, the rear spoiler is extended.
Operating the programs
Retracting the rear spoiler
Possible at vehicle speeds below Press the button Program
65 mph/110 km/h.
DSC OFF
Press the button.
TRACTION
The rear spoiler is retracted and the LED goes SPORT+

out. SPORT
The system is in automatic mode. COMFORT
At vehicle speeds below 10 mph/20 km/h: ECO PRO
Hold the button down.
Automatic program change
The rear spoiler is retracted and the LED goes The system automatically switches to COM‐
out. FORT in the following situations:
The system is in automatic mode. ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
Malfunction
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
A Check Control message is displayed. The
TION or DSC OFF mode.
rear spoiler is no longer extended or retracted
automatically.
DSC OFF
Allow the system to cool down, and if neces‐
When DSC OFF, refer to page 117, is active,
sary have it checked by the service center.
driving stability is limited during acceleration
If a malfunction occurs, the Dynamic Stability and when driving in bends.
Control DSC is activated at speeds higher than
45 mph/70 km/h. TRACTION
If the rear spoiler no longer extends, do not ex‐ When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
ceed a speed of 65 mph/110 km/h for the rest maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
of the journey. Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 118, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in bends.
120
SPORT+ ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.

Sporty driving with optimized chassis and SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ vated:
bilization.
1. "Settings"
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
2. "Driving mode"
The driver handles several of the stabilization
3. "Configure SPORT"
tasks.
4. Configure driving mode.
Activating SPORT+ This configuration is retrieved when the
Press the button repeatedly until SPORT driving mode is activated.
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights COMFORT
up. For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Automatic program change

Activating COMFORT
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode. Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, the system automatically
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
Dynamic Traction Control is activated. program change, refer to page 120.
ECO PRO
SPORT ECO PRO, refer to page 175, provides consis‐
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
and engine control for greater driving agility maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
with maximum driving stabilization. zation.
The program can be configured to individual Comfort functions and the engine controller
specifications. The configuration is stored for are adjusted.
the remote control currently in use. The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT Activating ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
Configuring SPORT cluster.
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 122, the SPORT driving Configuring ECO PRO
mode can be set to individual specifications. 1. Activate ECO PRO.
▷ Activating SPORT. 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
▷ "Configure SPORT"
121
Make the desired settings. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is being used, the vehicle may roll back
Configure driving mode slightly.
Settings can be made for the following driving Driving off without delay
modes in Driving mode:
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 121. ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 176. will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
Displays rolling back.◀
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.

Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
122
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
consumption.
Notes
equipment or country variant. This also applies Personal responsibility
for safety-related functions and systems. The system does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her speed,
distance and driving style to the traffic condi‐
Active Cruise Control with tions. Drive attentively, and react to the current
Stop & Go function, ACC traffic events. Intervene actively when neces‐
sary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an
The concept evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger
of an accident.◀
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads. At a glance
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle Buttons on the steering wheel
ahead of you.
Press the Function
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the button
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. System on/off, interrupt, refer
to page 124
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes Store/maintain speed, refer to
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead page 124
begins moving faster.
Resume speed, refer to
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the page 126
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your Reduce distance, refer to
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is page 125
able to accelerate if operated accordingly.
Increase distance, refer to
Even if some time passes before the vehicle page 125
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply. Rocker switch:
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to Change/maintain speed, refer
the desired speed. to page 124
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
123
Controls Driving comfort
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ If switching off the system while stationary,
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐ press on the brake pedal at the same time.
try-specific variants.
Press the button.
Radar sensor
▷ If active: press twice.
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ▷ If interrupted: press once.
vehicle. The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ ▷ When the brakes are applied.
tection of vehicles.
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ gaged.
move layers of snow and ice carefully. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar activated or DSC is deactivated.
sensor. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
Switching on/off and interrupting opened when the vehicle is standing still.
cruise control
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
Switching on an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without road edge line
Press the button on the steering markings.
wheel.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
light up and the marking in the speedometer is
set to the current speed. Maintaining/storing the speed
Cruise control can be used. Press the button.
Switching off Or:

Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
124
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
terrupted. until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
When the system is switched on, the current
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
clear.
speed.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
the point of resistance, the desired speed
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
increases or decreases by approx.
the instrument cluster, refer to page 126.
1 mph/1 km/h.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
past the point of resistance, the desired
if necessary.
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Changing, maintaining, and storing
the speed Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted to maintain and store the
current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Distance
is switched on, if necessary.
Selecting a distance
Adapting the desired speed Adjust the distance according to the traf‐
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ the prescribed safety distance.◀
curring.◀
Speed differences
Reduce distance
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐ Press the button repeatedly until the
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐ desired distance is set.
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
The selected distance, refer to page 126, is
ing situations:
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves Increase distance
into the wrong lane.◀ Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
125
The selected distance, refer to page 126, is 2. Release the brake pedal.
displayed in the instrument cluster. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
the RES button or the rocker switch when
Calling up the desired speed and the vehicle ahead of you drives away.
distance
Displays in the instrument cluster
While driving
Press the button with the system Desired speed
switched on. ▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
▷ When the system is switched off.
interrupted.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling
Brief status display
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ Selected desired speed.
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
The system brought the vehicle to a complete tem requirements for operation are currently
standstill. not met.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ The selected distance to the vehicle driving
dar sensor moves off. ahead of you is shown.
▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange: Distance display
no automatic driving away.
Distance 1
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator briefly or
press the RES or SET button. Distance 2
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off. Distance 3
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle: Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
1. Press the button to call up a stored switched on.
desired speed.
126
Distance display The system can also be activated when sta‐

tionary.
The system has been interrupted or
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
distance control is deactivated be‐
uation when using the system.
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Detection range
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

away.
The indicator and warning lamps do not The detection capacity of the system and the
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt automatic braking capacity are limited.
his or her desired driving speed and style to Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
the traffic conditions.◀ for instance might not be detected.
The vehicle symbol lights up orange: Limited detection capacity
A vehicle has been detected ahead of Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
you. pacity of the camera and the sensor, you
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there
The conditions are not adequate for is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the Deceleration
brakes until you actively assume control by
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
of traffic congestion.
acoustic signal sounds:
The system also does not respond to:
braking or making an evasive maneuver. ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
System limits
▷ Stationary objects.
Speed range ▷ Cross traffic.
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐ ▷ Oncoming traffic.
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
127
No warnings Unexpected lane change

A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves

into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
does not react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
the system requests that the driver intervene
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
speed.
vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
otherwise, there is the danger of an accident In tight curves, situations may result due to the
occurring.◀ restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐
able delay.
128
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
When approaching a curve, the system may

Cruise control
react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
The concept
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator The system is functional at speeds beginning
pedal is released, the system becomes active at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
again and independently controls the speed. It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
Driving away The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or Unfavorable conditions
behind bumps in the road. Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐
Radar sensor stant speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
For US owners only
▷ In heavy traffic.
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ on a loose road surface.
erned by the following: Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐
FCC ID: cle and cause an accident.◀
▷ OAYARS3-A
General information
Compliance statement:
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
also set to a driving style that saves on fuel
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
consumption.
two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
129
Controls ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
At a glance gaged.
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
Press the button Function rent speed.
Interrupt system on/off ▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
Store speed or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
Resume speed
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Changing the speed Press the button.
Or
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the

current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
If the system is deactivated or inter‐
rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if When the system is switched on, the current
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, speed is maintained and stored as the desired
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ speed.
Press the button. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly

displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 131.
▷ If active: press twice.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
▷ If interrupted: press once.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
The displays go out. The stored desired speed if necessary.
is deleted.
Changing/maintaining speed
Interrupting the system The rocker switch can be pressed while the
When active, press the button. system is interrupted in order to maintain and
store the current speed.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
130
Adapting the desired speed Displays in the instrument cluster

Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ Indicator lamp
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
curring.◀ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
until the desired speed is set.
is switched off.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear. Brief status display
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to Selected desired speed.
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
tem requirements for operation are currently
past the point of resistance, the desired
not met.
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ PDC Park Distance Control
ance point and holding it there accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without requiring The concept
pressure on the accelerator. After the
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
rocker switch is released, the vehicle main‐
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
tains its final speed. Pressing the switch
hind your vehicle are indicated with:
beyond the resistance point causes the ve‐
hicle to accelerate more rapidly. ▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button. General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
The stored speed is reached and maintained. sors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
131
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two Switching on/off

corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Switching on automatically
5 ft/1.50 m. Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Notes
Check the traffic situation as well
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
The system switches off when a certain driving
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
distance or speed is exceeded.
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Switch the system back on if necessary.
dent could result from road users or objects
located outside of the PDC detection range. Switching on/off manually
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐ Press the button.
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀ ▷ On: the LED lights up.
Avoid driving quickly with PDC ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Avoid approaching an object quickly. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rearview camera, refer to page 134, can be
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
switched on.
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐ Switching on the rearview camera via
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
At a glance
"Rear view camera"
Button in the vehicle The rearview camera image is displayed. The

setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
PDC Park Distance Control tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
132
If objects are located both in front of and be‐ System limits

hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐ The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
prox. 3 seconds: cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
sors.
▷ With low objects.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
The signal tone is switched off:
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐ move into the blind area of the sensors before
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged. High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, False warnings
refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐ PDC may issue a warning under the following
tainment, Communication. conditions even though there is no obstacle
The setting is stored for the remote control within the detection range:
currently in use. ▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
Visual warning
ice.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are displayed on the Control ▷ On rough road surfaces.
Display before a signal tone sounds. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
A display appears as soon as Park Distance smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
Control (PDC) is activated. rages.
The range of the sensors is represented in the ▷ In heavy exhaust.
colors red, green and yellow. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
If the rearview camera image was selected last, sweeping machines, high pressure steam
it again appears on the display. To switch to cleaners or neon lights.
PDC: The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
ous tone alternating between the front and
1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
on the Control Display.
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
2. Press the controller. ger present, the system is again fully func‐
The setting is stored for the remote control tional.
currently in use.
Malfunction
133
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded At a glance

area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Button in the vehicle
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept Rearview camera
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
Camera
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 134
▷ Side View, refer to page 136.
▷ Top View, refer to page 138.
Backup camera
The concept The camera lens is located in the handle of the
The backup camera provides assistance in tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area dirt.
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Display.
Hints Switching on/off

Check the traffic situation as well Switching on automatically
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ Select transmission position R with the engine
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ running.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
The backup camera image is displayed if the
cated outside the picture area of the backup
system was switched on via the iDrive.
camera.◀
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
Switch the system back on if necessary.
134
Switching on/off manually Pathway lines

Press the button.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via

the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on: ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
"Rear view camera" age when in transmission position R.
The rearview camera image is displayed. The ▷ Help you to estimate the space required
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ when parking and maneuvering on level
rently in use. roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐
Display on the Control Display gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
Turning circle lines
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐
played.
▷ Obstacle marking ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age.
"Obstacle marking"
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
135
Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding
General information turning circle line.
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown

in the rearview camera image. Display settings
Their colored steps match the markings of the
Brightness
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown. With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
Parking using pathway and turning 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
circle lines is reached, and press the controller.
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐
cle lines lead to within the limits of the Contrast
parking space. With the rearview camera switched on:

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detected by the rearview camera.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
136
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
cle record the traffic situation on each side. Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
Notes
Switching on/off
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could Automatic deactivation during forward
result from road users or objects located out‐ travel
side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
At a glance
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Cameras
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image. 1. "Contrast"
The two camera lenses are located on the 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
sides of the bumper. is reached, and press the controller.
137
System limits Top View

The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Cameras
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneu‐
vering. The area around the doors and the road
area around the vehicle are shown on the Con‐
trol Display for this purpose.
General information The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
The image is captured by two cameras cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the ings. The image quality may be impaired by
backup camera. dirt.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and Clean the lens, refer to page 223.
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the Switching on/off
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Switching on automatically
Notes Select transmission position R with the engine
Check the traffic situation as well running.
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ the system is switched on via iDrive.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the Automatic deactivation during forward
cameras.◀ travel
At a glance distance or speed is exceeded.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.

Top View is displayed.
138
Switching on the backup camera via Contrast

the iDrive With Top View switched on:
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The is reached, and press the controller.
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use. Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
Display
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
Visual warning
when the steering wheel is turned all the
The approach of the vehicle to an object can way.
be shown on the Control Display.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
When the distance to an object is small, a red you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
the PDC display.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ With a door open.
activated. ▷ With the tailgate open.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
it again appears on the display when reverse ▷ In poor light.
gear is selected. To switch to Top View: A Check Control message is displayed in some
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on of these situations.
the Control Display.
currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:

139
Parking assistant Transporting loads

Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
The concept of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
lel to the road. cle may become damaged.◀
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces An engine that has been switched off by the
on both sides of the vehicle. Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated.
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure. Requirements
When parking, also take note of the visual and
For measuring parking spaces
acoustic information issued by the PDC and
the parking assistant and react accordingly. ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 131. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Hints
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
The parking assistant does not relieve length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
the driver of responsibility for the vehicle dur‐
▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
ing the parking procedure.
length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
Watch the parking space and parking proce‐
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
dure closely and intervene if necessary; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident.◀
For parking procedure
Changes to the parking space ▷ Closed doors.
Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Parking brake released.
measured are not taken into account by the
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
system.
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ must be set.
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
140
At a glance Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Without Professional navigation

spaces are located on the wheel arches. system or TV: system status
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button The status is displayed with symbols.

Press the button.
Gray: parking space search.
The LED lights up.
Blue: the system is activated. A
The current status of the parking space search suitable parking space was
is indicated on the Control Display. found.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
141
The parking procedure is active. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐

Steering control has been tive. Steering control has
seized. been seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active

Status of the parking space search whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant

Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. ing assistant and PDC.
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
The vehicle is parked in the parking space with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
if the parking procedure is active. danger of an accident.◀
▷ No display: no parking space search. 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if necessary.
With navigation system professional The status of the parking space search is
or TV: status of the system indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement after the gear change when the
vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐ essary.
sistant is activated and search for parking
space active. Interrupting manually
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the time:
road as on the Control Display. When the ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
parking assistant is active, suitable parking on the Control Display.
spaces are highlighted. ▷ Press the button.
142
Interrupting automatically ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

The system is interrupted automatically in the ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
following situations: roads.
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if ▷ On slippery ground.
he takes over steering. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match ▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
the instruction on the Control Display. parking space.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite
direction to the desired side for parking. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
6 mph/10 km/h. cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces the following circumstances:
if necessary. ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ If doors are open. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ If the tailgate is open. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to ledges or cargo.
overcome, such as curbs. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
arise. such as fences.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. move into the blind area of the sensors before
A Check Control message is displayed. or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
Continuing not be detected.
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ The parking assistant may identify parking
tinued if necessary. spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this. Malfunction
System limits The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ When towing a trailer.
Functional limitations
▷ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
143
Head-up Display ▷ Speed limit detection.

▷ Cruise control.
The concept ▷ Pedestrian warning.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
This system projects important information 3. "Displayed information"
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
In this way, the driver can get information with‐ Display.
out averting his or her eyes from the road. The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Display visibility
Setting the brightness
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by: The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
▷ Certain sitting positions.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play. 1. "Settings"
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Wet roads. 3. "Brightness"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 4. Turn the controller.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ When the low beams are switched on, the
tings. brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
Switching on/off ing.
1. "Settings" The setting is stored for the remote control
2. "Head-Up Display" currently in use.
Adjusting the height
Display 1. "Settings"
Overview 3. "Height"
▷ Speed. 4. Turn the controller.
▷ Navigation system. The setting is stored for the remote control
▷ Check Control messages. currently in use.
▷ Collision warning.
144
Setting the rotation

1. "Settings"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller.
currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
placed by a service center only.
145
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 51 6 Temperature

2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 51
3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
146
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 147, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Manual air distribution gram.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
Temperature
termediate setting. Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
The automatic climate control reaches this
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
well.
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
▷ Footwell. put, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
Defrosting windows and removing perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature.
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
necessary, use the cooling function. Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
Rear window defroster cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
The air is cooled and dehumidified
off automatically after a certain period of time.
and, depending on the temperature setting,
warmed again.
Air flow, manual
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
Press the left or right side of the but‐ fog up briefly when the engine is started.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐ cally with the AUTO program.
duced automatically to save battery power. When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐
AUTO program ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Press the button.
Recirculated-air mode
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically. You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Depending on the selected temperature and rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
outside influences, the air is directed to the system then recirculates the air currently
windshield, side windows, upper body, and within the vehicle.
into the footwell. Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
147
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Switching on

▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply Press any button except
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ ▷ Rear window defroster.
nently blocked.
▷ Seat heating.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air volume, if Microfilter
necessary.
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
Continuous recirculated-air mode crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.
The recirculated-air mode should not be This filter should be replaced during scheduled
used for an extended period of time, as the air maintenance, refer to page 201, of your vehi‐
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ cle.
ily.◀
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 51 3 AUTO program

2 Temperature, left 4 Display
148
5 Maximum cooling 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity

6 Temperature, right 12 Air distribution, left
7 Seat heating, right 51 13 Rear window defroster
8 Cooling function 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ clear
lated-air mode 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
10 Air distribution, right sation
Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
Temperature matic control of the air flow and air distribution
Turn the wheel to set the de‐ can be adjusted.
sired temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ of the automatic climate control.
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
put, and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Press the button.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
just the set temperature. mode.
AUTO program Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
Press the button.
The air is cooled fastest when the engine is
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
running.
perature are controlled automatically.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
Depending on the selected temperature, the gram is active.
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows, Cooling function
upper body, and into the footwell. The passenger compartment can only be
The cooling function, refer to page 149, is cooled with the engine running.
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Press the button.
gram.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
and – depending on the temperature setting –
trols the program so as to prevent window
warmed again.
condensation as much as possible.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
149
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
cally with the AUTO program. driver's side only.
When using the automatic climate control, If the windows are fogged over, press the
condensation water, refer to page 170, devel‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle. sor.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ Air flow, manual

recirculated-air mode To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ switch off the AUTO program first.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Press the left or right side of the but‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle. The selected air flow is shown on the display of
Press the button repeatedly to select the automatic climate control.
an operating mode: The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. power.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the Rear window defroster
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
Press the button.
matically.
The rear window defroster switches
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
off automatically after a certain period of time.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Defrosting windows and removing
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO condensation
button to utilize the condensation sensor. Press the button.
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐ Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
shield. moved from the windshield and the front side
Continuous recirculated-air mode windows.
The recirculated-air mode should not be The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
used for an extended period of time, as the air gram is active.
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐
ily.◀ If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
Manual air distribution sor.
Press the button repeatedly to select
a program: Switching the system on/off
▷ Upper body region. Switching off

▷ Upper body region and footwell. Press the left button for the minimum
▷ Footwell. speed.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
150
Switching on Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Press any button except
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 201, of your vehi‐
cle.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
Ventilation
row 2.
Front ventilation Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
arrow 1.
essary.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
The system can be switched on and off at any
vents continuously, arrows 2.
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ ing two preset switch-on times. It remains
row 3. switched on for 30 minutes.
Toward blue: colder. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Toward red: warmer. Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Adjusting the ventilation Switching on/off directly

▷ Ventilation for cooling: 1. "Settings"
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ 2. "Climate"
rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot 3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
from the sun. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
▷ Draft-free ventilation: trol flashes if the system is switched on.
151
Preselecting the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
152
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Compatibility
All standard, country-specific and optional If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
equipment that is offered in the model series is ing or in the instructions of the system
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ment is also described that is not available in a ally compatible with the integrated universal
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional remote control.
equipment or country variant. This also applies If you have any questions, please contact:
for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Integrated universal remote HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐

control son Controls, Inc.
The concept Controls on the interior rearview

The integrated universal remote control can mirror
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The integrated universal remote con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
During programming ▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
During programming and before activat‐ ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐ quired for programming.
mote control, ensure that there are no people,
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, Programming
there is a risk of injury or damage.
General information
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security. Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
153
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
the interior rearview mirror. rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to features an alternating-code system. Flashing
8 cm away from the buttons on the interior and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds.
pends on the manual transmitter. For systems with an alternating-code system,
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button the integrated universal remote control and the
of the desired function on the hand-held system also have to be synchronized.
transmitter and the button to be program‐ Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The tem being set up for information on how to
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ synchronize the system.
gin flashing slowly. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED ond person.
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is To synchronize:
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
programmed. mote-controlled system.
If the LED does not flash faster after at 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ rearview mirror as described.
tween the interior rearview mirror and the 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. on the system being programmed. You
Several more attempts at different distan‐ have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
15 seconds between attempts. interior rearview mirror for approximately
Canada: if programming with the hand- 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
held transmitter was interrupted, hold repeat this work step up to three times in
down the interior rearview mirror button order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
and repeatedly press and release the chronization is complete, the programmed
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ function will be carried out.
onds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
rior rearview mirror buttons. button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
Special feature of the alternating- starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
code wireless system transmitter for the system to be controlled
If you are unable to operate the system after approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
repeated programming, please check if the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ required distance depends on the manual
ing-code system. transmitter.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
154
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this Digital compass
indicates that the button on the interior
rearview mirror has been programmed. At a glance
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button
and repeatedly press and release the
2 Mirror display
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Mirror display
Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the
Before operation mirror when driving straight.
Before operating a system using the

Operating concept
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects Various functions can be called up by pressing
within the range of movement of the remote- the control button with a pointed object, such
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
injury or damage. The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
trol button is pressed:
held transmitter.◀
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
the button within receiving range of the system setting.
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Deleting stored functions
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones.
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
155
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone correspond‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
ing to your location appears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ on the display. Next, drive in a complete
pass is ready for use again after approximately circle at least once at a speed of no more
10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
Calibrating the digital compass the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐ The digital compass is already set for right or
played. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
156
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐

proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
Raise cover.
devices
Emptying Hints
Take out the insert. Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
Lighter
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
Danger of burns may damage the battery.◀
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
Replace the cover after use
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Sockets
Replace the cover after use The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
157
Front center console In the cargo area
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐ The socket is located on the left side in the
rette lighter. cargo area.
In the front passenger footwell

USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 34.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
The socket is located below the glove com‐ cation.
partment.
▷ Importing trips, see user's manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
Rear center console
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
Remove the cover.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐

partment.
158
With Professional navigation system Removing

or TV: at a glance
Cargo cover in rear window
1. Pull the cargo cover towards the rear by
the outer edges, arrows 1, to disengage it
from the catches.
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐

rest.
Notes
2. Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 2,
Observe the following when connecting:
and remove it.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface. Cargo cover in the cargo area
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Cargo area
Cargo cover Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 1, until it
disengages from the catches and then pull it
Note towards the front, arrow 2.
Do not deposit heavy objects
Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on Stowing
the trunk cover. Otherwise, they could endan‐ 1. Lift the cargo room floor.
ger occupants during braking and evasive ma‐
2. Place the tailgate window cargo cover in
neuvers, for example.◀
the section on the right and the other cover
General information
The cargo cover is in two parts. It can be re‐
moved and stowed under the cargo room floor
when transporting bulky items.
159
in the section on the left under the cargo as it should be, and there is increased danger
room floor. of injury due to unexpected movement of the
seat backrest.◀
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged

When folding back the backrest, be sure
that it locks in place securely. When this hap‐
pens the red warning field on the seat disap‐
pears. If it is not properly engaged, transported
cargo could enter the passenger compartment
during braking or evasive maneuvers and en‐
danger the vehicle occupants.◀
Installing Retract the head restraint if necessary

Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The before backrest is folded down
cargo covers must snap audibly into place on With folding head restraints, fold in the head
their respective holders. restraints before folding down the backrests,
or damage may result.◀
Enlarging the cargo area
Using the middle safety belt
General information If the middle safety belt in the rear is
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding used, the larger section of the backrest must
down the rear seat backrest. be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not
the rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40– have a restraining effect.◀
20–40. The sides and the middle section can
be folded down separately. Folding down the sides
The sides can be folded down from the front or
Hints from the cargo area. The backrests fold for‐
Danger of pinching ward automatically.
Before folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in the area of movement and
that no one reaches into the area of movement
of the rear seat backrests when the middle
section is folded down. Otherwise, injury or
damage may result.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position

Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Before mounting child restraint fixing
systems, place the seat backrest as far as pos‐
sible at an angle at which the child seat is rest‐
ing firmly against the backrest and all back‐
rests can be locked securely in place.
Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable
160
Placing the rear seat backrest in the

upright position
Or: pull the respective lever inside the cargo

area.
Pull the lever and hold it, arrow. Adjust the

Folding down the middle section backrest angle.
Reset to standard position

Pull the lever and hold it, arrow. Fold the back‐
rest all the way back and let it engage.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Loading position
Note
Rear seats in the loading position
Do not fold the rear seats down when in
the loading position, as this would result in a
safety risk. Place the rear seat backrest in the
original position before folding the seat
down.◀
The concept
To expand the cargo area, the rear seat back‐
rest can be moved into a vertical position.
The sides can be folded down separately to
various angles of inclination.
161
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 163.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
ment is also described that is not available in a console, refer to page 164.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
equipment or country variant. This also applies armrest, refer to page 163.
Glove compartment
Notes
Front passenger side
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Note
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐ Close the glove compartment again im‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants mediately
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
neuvers.◀ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Opening
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 163. Pull the handle.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger The light in the glove compartment switches
side, refer to page 162. on.
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage The net in the glove compartment is provided
compartment, in front of the cupholders, for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,
refer to page 163. refer to page 164.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 163. Closing
Fold up the cover.
162
Storage compartments Controls
Locking Compartments in the doors

After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
Do not stow any breakable objects
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key. Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
Driver's side an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately Center armrest
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
Front
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀ A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Opening
Pull the handle.

Fold the center armrest up.
Closing
Repositioning
Fold up the cover.
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Front storage compartment Connection for an external audio

device
.
Description, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication.
Rear
The rear center armrest contains a storage
Raise the lid to open it. compartment.
163
Controls Storage compartments
Opening Storage tray for front cupholders

The cupholder with the storage tray can be
used for additional storage. To do this, place
the storage tray in the cupholder.
Only use the storage tray for small objects,
such as keys or the remote control.
When not in use, stow the storage tray in the
glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray
into the net so that the top surface faces up.
Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.
Pull the cover up.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Storage compartment in the
rear
Storage compartment is located in the rear
center console.
Cupholders
Hints
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
To open: press the button.
drinks
To close: push both covers back in, one after
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
the other.
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Pushing back the covers
Unsuitable containers Push back the covers before folding up
the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
could become damaged.◀
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front Clothes hooks

The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
164
Storage compartments Controls
No heavy objects There are also two movable lashing eyes on a

Do not hang heavy objects from the rail system.
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ Storage compartment under cargo
neuvers.◀ floor panel
Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
Storage compartments in the exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
cargo area 20 kg in the storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.◀
Net Raise the cargo floor panel. The integrated gas
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the pressure spring holds the cargo area floor
right side. panel in a raised position automatically for eas‐
ier loading. To close the cargo area floor panel,
Hooks/multi-function hook simply press it down.
Partitioning the compartment

The compartment can be divided using an at‐
tachable partition.
Cargo position of the rear seat

backrest, rear seat backrest tilt
To enlarge the cargo area, move the rear seat
backrest into the loading position, refer to
A multi-function hook is located on each side page 161.
of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks
can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Light and suitable objects only

Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 172, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
165
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
Breaking-in period
engage the clutch gently.
General information
Following part replacement
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other. The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
The following instructions will help achieve a above have to be renewed in the course of the
long vehicle life and good economy. vehicle's operating life.
Engine and differential

Always obey the official speed limit. General driving notes
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Closing the tailgate
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
Drive with the tailgate closed
speed:
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
100 mph/160 km/h.
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ users may be injured, and the vehicle may be
stances. damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
ter the passenger compartment.◀
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
avoided:
increased.
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Tires ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Due to technical factors associated with their ▷ Drive moderately.
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
168
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system Driving through water

Hot exhaust system Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
High temperatures are generated in the
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
exhaust system.
6 mph/10 km/h.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, tions
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot Do not exceed this water depth and walking
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact electrical systems and the transmission may
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ be damaged.◀
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐
age. Braking safely
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
there is the danger of getting burned.◀ ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
Mobile communication devices in the way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
vehicle sary.
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
hicle ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐ minimum of steering effort.
munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
side the vehicle without connecting them di‐ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the active mode.
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐ Objects in the area around the pedals
tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
No objects in the area around the pedals
generated during transmission will be dis‐
charged from the vehicle interior.◀ Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
Hydroplaning
impeded while driving
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
form between the tires and road surface.
mats or other objects.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
Only use floor mats that have been approved
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
loss of contact between the tires and the road
place.
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
Hydroplaning ing, for example.◀
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
169
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Driving in wet conditions Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
When roads are wet coated with road salt or brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected.
sure on the brake pedal every few miles.
Condensation under the parked
Ensure that this action does not endanger
vehicle
other road users.
When using the automatic climate control,
The heat generated in this process helps dry
condensation water develops that exits under‐
the brake discs and pads.
neath the vehicle.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
when you need it.
normal.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral

Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion

The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
170
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle equipment vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
equipment or country variant. This also applies and passengers from XXX kilograms or
for safety-related functions and systems. YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
Hints pacity.
Overloading the vehicle For example, if the YYY amount equals

1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
increases the rate at which damage develops 400 lbs.
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
No fluids in the trunk cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the available cargo and luggage load capacity
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ calculated in Step 4.
aged.◀
Load
Determining the load limit
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard: The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
171
Driving tips Loading
Stowing cargo Securing cargo

Always position and secure the cargo as
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
described above; otherwise, it can endanger
cargo.
the car's occupants if sudden braking or
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ swerving becomes necessary.
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
the rear passenger seat backrests.
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
occupied, secure each of the outer safety den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
belts in the opposite buckle. pants.◀
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of Roof-mounted luggage rack
the backrests.
Note
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing cargo
Securing
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
To secure the cargo there are four lashing

eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo The anchorage points are located in the roof

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ drip rail above the doors.
taining straps, the floor net or draw straps. Fold the cover outward.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps. Loading
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
area.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
172
Loading Driving tips
Therefore, note the following when loading

and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in
area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
173
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close the windows and glass
All standard, country-specific and optional sunroof
equipment that is offered in the model series is Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ open results in increased air resistance and
ment is also described that is not available in a raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for various ways, for instance fuel consumption
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ can be influenced by the size of the tires.
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
ferent factors. regularly
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an tion pressure at least twice a month and before
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ starting on a long trip.
ronmental impact. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Remove attached parts the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
following use
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage reach its operating temperature.
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Look well ahead when
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
174
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐

mined by other factors, such as driving style,
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ road conditions, maintenance or environmental
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. factors.
When accelerating, shift up before reaching
high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into Switch off any functions that
the highest applicable gear and drive with the are not currently needed
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
stop-and-go traffic.
The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
cates the most fuel efficient gear.
are not actually needed.
Use coasting conditions

Have maintenance carried
When approaching a red light, take your foot out
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the
Have the maintenance carried out by your
accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
service center.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 201.
Switch off the engine during

longer stops ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic The concept
congestion. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle climate control output, are adjusted.
automatically switches off the engine during a In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
stop. be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
If the engine is switched off and then restarted that optimizes fuel consumption.
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ The extension of the range that is achieved as
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are a result can be displayed in the instrument
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ cluster.
onds of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐ At a glance
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐ The system includes the following
turely. EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
175
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 176. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
page 177 cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
consumption can be economized.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 176. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
mirror heating are also reduced.
Activating ECO PRO The exterior mirror heating is made available
when outside temperatures are very cold.
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can
be achieved with the current configuration is
Configuring ECO PRO displayed.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument cluster

1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO" ECO PRO bonus range
3. Configure the program. An extension of the range can
be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
Via the iDrive ing style.
1. "Settings" This may be displayed as the
2. "ECO PRO mode" bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
Or
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
1. "Settings"
The bonus range is automatically reset every
2. "Driving mode" time the vehicle is refueled.
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program. Driving style
ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving
"ECO PRO climate control"
style.
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for
cient.
energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
176
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display Symbol Measure

when accelerating.
Automatic transmission: switch
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
from M/S to D and avoid manual
the color of the bar:
shift interventions.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual shift transmission: follow
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by shifting instructions.
backing off the accelerator pedal.
Manual shift transmission: engage
The display switches to blue as soon as all neutral for engine stop.
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving
are met.
Indications on the Control Display
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction
EfficientDynamics
The arrow indicates that the
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
driving style can be adjusted to
ogy can be displayed during driving.
be more fuel efficient by backing
off the accelerator for instance. 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Note
Displaying fuel consumption history
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
played within an adjustable time frame.
PRO display is activated.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
lected time frame.
1. "Settings" Trip interruptions are represented below the
2. "Info display" bar on the time axis.
3. "ECO PRO Info" "Consumption history"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols Adjusting fuel consumption history

An additional symbol and a text instruction are time frame
displayed. Select the symbol.
Symbol Measure Resetting fuel consumption history

For efficient driving style, back off 1. Open "Options".
the accelerator or delay accelerating 2. "Reset consumption history"
to allow time to assess road condi‐
tions. Displaying EfficientDynamics info
Reduce speed to the selected ECO The current efficiency can be displayed.
PRO speed. "EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Automatic engine start-stop function.
177
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
Display ECO PRO tips sive current.
"ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated.

The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
Coasting a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
The concept the following conditions are satisfied:
The system helps to conserve fuel. ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged. tion D.
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐ temperature.
sion position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ Display
ing.
Display in the instrument cluster
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed, the engine is automatically coupled The mark in the bar display be‐
to the transmission again. low the tachometer is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero
Hints point. The tachometer approxi‐
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ mately indicates idle speed.
fer to page 175, driving mode. The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO the zero point during coasting.
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 120. Indications on the Control Display
The function is available in a certain speed The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
range. EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver is active.
to use the function as often as possible and
supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐
ing.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
178
Functional requirement
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO Analyser
Via the Driving Dynamics Control

1. Activate ECO PRO.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting. 3. Select the symbol.
Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1. "Vehicle Info" Display on the Control Display
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 176, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use. The display of the ECO PRO Analysers con‐
sists of a symbolized road route and a lookup
ECO PRO Analyser table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
The concept ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
The system helps in this situation to develop the smoother the depicted road route be‐
an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ comes, arrow 1.
serve fuel. The table of values contains stars. The more
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
The assessment is done in various categories cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
and is displayed on the Control Display. range increases, arrow 2.
Using this indication, the individual driving If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
PRO tips are displayed during the drive.
an efficient driving style. This gain in range is
displayed as a bonus range in the instrument Tips about the energy saving driving style,
cluster and on the Control Display. Conserving fuel, refer to page 174.
179
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

General information 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

Refuel promptly to the fuel filler flap.
Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap. Closing
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
182
Refueling Mobility
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To

do this, lift and remove the cover using the
vehicle tool kit.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
183
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
ment is also described that is not available in a BMW recommends AKI 89.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
formance.◀
Fuel recommendation If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
Gasoline when starting at high outside temperatures.
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should This has no effect on the engine life.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuel quality
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result
taining metal must not be used. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
out metallic additives. ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur.
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
converter and other components.◀ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
standards: ers.
US: ASTM 4806–xx Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
tenance.◀
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
184
Wheels and tires Mobility
Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 186, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
brands. This information can be obtained from
your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
sure influence the following: 100 mph/160 km/h
▷ The service life of the tires. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
▷ Road safety. optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
▷ Driving comfort. to page 186, and adjust as necessary.
Checking the pressure

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When the
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ These pressure values can also be found on
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ door pillar.
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition Maximum permissible speed
that may not only compromise your vehicle's Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
and the risk of an accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:

▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
185
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure values up to 335i, 335i xDrive

100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
328i, 328i xDrive tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tions in bar/PSI
tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires 225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
+S XL A/S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V
225/55 R 17 97 H M 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/50 R 18 99 V M
+S A/S RSC
+S XL RSC
Rear: 225/55 R 17
97 Y RSC 225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
+S XL A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M
+S RSC Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
95 V - 2.2 / 32
225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
+S XL A/S RSC Rear:
255/45 R 18 99 V
225/50 R 18 95 V
225/50 R 18 99 V M Front: 225/45 R 19 2.2 / 32 -
+S XL RSC 92 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/40 R 19
225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
96 W RSC
+S XL A/S RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
95 V - 2.2 / 32
M 4.2 / 60
Rear:
255/45 R 18 99 V
Tire inflation pressures at max.
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.2 / 32 -
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
92 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Rear: 255/40 R 19
96 W RSC In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
M 4.2 / 60 relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
186
Tire inflation pressure values over Tire size Pressure specifications

100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI
328i Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
Without high-speed tuning feature
tires
tions in bar/PSI
225/55 R 17 97 W 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
Specifications in RSC
bar/PSI with cold
225/55 R 17 97 H M
tires
+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 W 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

225/55 R 17 97 H M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 RSC
+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V M
Rear: 225/55 R 17 +S XL RSC
97 Y RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M Front: 225/50 R 18 2.6 / 38 -
+S RSC 95 V - 2.9 /42
Rear:
225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 255/45 R 18 99 V
+S XL A/S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V Front: 225/45 R 19 2.8 / 41 -
92 W RSC - 3.1 / 45
225/50 R 18 99 V M
+S XL RSC Rear: 255/40 R 19
96 W RSC
225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
+S XL A/S RSC Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 - M 4.2 / 60
95 V - 2.4 / 35
Rear:
328i xDrive
255/45 R 18 99 V
Without high-speed tuning feature
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
92 W RSC - 2.6 / 38
Rear: 255/40 R 19
96 W RSC

T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
187
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifications

tions in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
225/55 R 17 97 H M 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 225/55 R 17 97 W 2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39

+S A/S RSC RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 225/55 R 17 97 H M
RSC +S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H M 225/50 R 18 95 W 2.5 / 36 2.9 /42
+S RSC RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 225/50 R 18 99 V M
+S XL A/S RSC +S XL RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V Front: 225/50 R 18 2.5 / 36 -
225/50 R 18 99 V M 95 V - 2.7 / 39
+S XL RSC Rear:
225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 255/45 R 18 99 V
+S XL A/S RSC Front: 225/45 R 19 2.7 / 391 -
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 - 92 W RSC - 2.9 /42
95 V - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 255/40 R 19
Rear: 96 W RSC
255/45 R 18 99 V Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.4 / 35 - T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
92 W RSC - 2.6 / 38 M 4.2 / 60
Rear: 255/40 R 19
96 W RSC 335i
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of Without high-speed tuning feature
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
188
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifications

tions in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Front: 225/50 R 18 2.6 / 38 -

bar/PSI with cold 95 W RSC - 2.9 /42
tires Rear:
255/45 R 18 99 W
RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
+S XL A/S RSC Front: 225/45 R 19 2.8 / 41 -
225/50 R 18 95 V 92 W RSC - 3.1 / 45
225/50 R 18 99 V M Rear: 255/40 R 19
+S XL RSC 96 W RSC
225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of

+S XL A/S RSC T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
95 V - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 335i xDrive
255/45 R 18 99 V Without high-speed tuning feature
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Tire size Pressure specifica‐

92 W RSC tions in bar/PSI
- 2.6 / 38
Rear: 255/40 R 19 Specifications in
96 W RSC bar/PSI with cold
tires
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 225/50 R 18 99 V M 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
+S XL A/S RSC
With high-speed tuning feature 225/50 R 18 95 V
Tire size Pressure specifications 225/50 R 18 99 V M
in bar/PSI +S XL RSC
Specifications in 225/45 R 19 96 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

bar/PSI with cold +S XL A/S RSC
tires Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
95 V - 2.4 / 35
225/50 R 18 95 W 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 Rear:
RSC 255/45 R 18 99 V
225/50 R 18 99 V M
+S XL RSC
189
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire identification marks

tions in bar/PSI
Tire size
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
92 W RSC 245/45 R 18 96 Y
- 2.6 / 38
Rear: 255/40 R 19 245: nominal width in mm
96 W RSC 45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
50 mph / 80 km/h 18: rim diameter in inches
T 135/90 R 17 104
M 4.2 / 60 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Tire size Pressure specifications
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
in bar/PSI
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
Specifications in
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
225/50 R 18 95 W 2.5 / 36 2.9 /42 Tire Identification Number

RSC
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
225/50 R 18 99 V M
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
+S XL RSC
xxx: tire size and tire design
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.5 / 36 -
1013: tire age
95 W RSC - 2.7 / 39
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
Rear:
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
255/45 R 18 99 W
RSC
Tire age
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.7 / 39 - DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
92 W RSC - 2.9 /42 10th week 2013.
Rear: 255/40 R 19
96 W RSC Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
190
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Traction AA A B C
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
Temperature A B C A represent higher levels of performance on
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law.
grades. Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
Treadwear
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ernment test course. For example, a tire possible tire failure.
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of RSC – Run-flat tires
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 194, are labeled
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters
ing habits, service practices and differences in RSC marked on the sidewall.
road characteristics and climate.
M+S
Traction Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, weather performance than summer tires.
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under Tire tread
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Summer tires
marked C may have poor traction performance. Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is 0.12 in/3 mm.
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
and does not include acceleration, cornering, the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Winter tires
Temperature
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, 0.16 in/4 mm.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
less suitable for winter operation.
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
191
Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening
for vehicle occupants and other traffic partici‐
pants.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ Repair of tire damage
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire damage
General information
Changing wheels and tires
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information on mounting tires
Notes Have mounting and balancing performed
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, only by a service center.
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If this work is not carried out properly, there is
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and the danger of subsequent damage and related
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be
with low-profile tires.
obtained from your service center.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
fects:
the function of a variety of systems such as
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. ABS or DSC.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
dency to pull to the left or right. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over figuration from a single manufacturer.
curbs, road damage, or similar things. Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
192
Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that sign and age of the tire casing structures can
have been approved for your particular vehicle limit service life and have a negative impact on
model. road safety.◀
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ Winter tires
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ provide better winter traction than summer
cle if they are mounted.◀ tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Recommended tire brands
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ cidents can occur.◀
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
Run-flat tires
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
standards for safety and handling.
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
New tires case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
Due to technical factors associated with their glad to advise you.
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
traction potential until after an initial breaking- Rotating wheels between axles
in period. The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
Drive conservatively for the first against switching wheels between the front
200 miles/300 km. and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Storage
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
193
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, Consult your service center for more informa‐
grease and fuels. tion.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
Run-flat tires ▷ 205/60 R 16.
▷ 225/55 R 16.
Label
▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
RSC label on the tire sidewall. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
The wheels are composed of special rims and mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ in incorrect readings.
gree. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a pressure loss. Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
when using snow chains.
page 104.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 101.
Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of your
vehicle, classified as road-safe and recom‐
mended.
194
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
195
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Indicator/warning lamps

When the hood is opened, a Check Control
Hints message is displayed.
Working in the engine compartment
Closing the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
ment in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot Hood open when driving
parts.◀ If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
Fold down wiper arm mediately and close it securely.◀
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Danger of pinching
may result in damage.◀ Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever in the interior:
Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again:
Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
196
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment 3. "Engine oil level"
All standard, country-specific and optional Oil level display messages

Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
messages.
equipment or country variant. This also applies If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US
for safety-related functions and systems. quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Too much engine oil
General information
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
The engine oil consumption is dependent on otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
the driving style and driving conditions. When age.◀
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil
consumption, for example, is clearly higher.
Detailed measurement
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling. The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is
checked and displayed via a scale.
Checking the oil level During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
electronically creased somewhat.
Status display General information

A detailed measurement is only possible with
The concept
certain engines.
The oil level is monitored electronically during
driving and shown on the Control Display. Requirements
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a ▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
check control message is displayed. position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
Requirements
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
Depending on the previous displays, the status transmission position N or P and accelera‐
display is displayed when the engine is running tor not depressed.
or after the vehicle has been driven for at least
▷ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is
30 minutes.
running at operating temperature.
Displaying the oil level
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
197
Mobility Engine oil
Performing a detailed measurement Oil types for refilling

In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level: Hints
1. "Vehicle Info" No oil additives
2. "Vehicle status" Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement" Viscosity grades for engine oils
The oil level is checked and displayed via a When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
scale. the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
Duration: approx. 1 minute. grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
Adding engine oil The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Filler neck Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐
able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.

When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km. Additional information about the approved
types of oils can be requested from the service
Do not add too much engine oil center.
When too much engine oil is added, im‐
mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, Alternative oil types
this may cause engine damage.◀ If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
Protect children specification can be added:
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
Gasoline engine
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀ API SM or superior grade specification.
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your
service center only.
198
Engine oil Mobility
199
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle equipment Adding engine oil
1. Let the engine cool.
equipment that is offered in the model series is 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
ment is also described that is not available in a cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional it.
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
Suitable additives to the specified level; do not overfill.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
engine damage may occur. The additives are The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
harmful to your health.◀ the cap must point towards one another.
Coolant consists of water and additives. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
Coolant level tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Checking
Marks are provided on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Symbol Meaning
Maximum
Minimum
1. Let the engine cool.

2. The coolant level is correct when it is be‐
tween these two marks.
200
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
ment is also described that is not available in a If this occurs, have a service center update the
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional time-dependent maintenance procedures,
equipment or country variant. This also applies such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
for safety-related functions and systems. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
BMW Maintenance System

Service history
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired maintenance measures and thereby Perform maintenance work at the service cen‐
supports you in maintaining road safety and ter and have them recorded in the vehicle data.
the operational reliability of the vehicle. The entries are like a service booklet of the
documentation of regular maintenance.
Displaying entered maintenance work on the
Condition Based Service Control Display, refer to page 82.
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
Information Booklet for US
mines the maintenance requirements. models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for
amount of maintenance you need to your user Canadian models
profile.
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Detailed information on service requirements, formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
refer to page 81, can be displayed on the Con‐ and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
trol Display. els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
Service data in the remote control Maintenance and repair should be performed
Information on the required maintenance is by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
continuously stored in the remote control. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
Your service center will read out this data and vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
suggest the right array of service procedures Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
for your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
mote control with which the vehicle was driven nance.
most recently.
201
Mobility Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tight‐
ened, the display should go out in a short time.
202
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind the windshield to prevent damage.◀
the left folding cover in the cargo area.
Lamp and bulb replacement

Wiper blade replacement
Hints
Note
Do not fold down the wipers without Lamps and bulbs
wiper blades Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades tion to vehicle safety.
have not been installed; this may damage the The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
windshield.◀ that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with
Replacing the wiper blades them or they are not described here.
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer You can obtain a selection of replacement
to page 69, the wiper arms. bulbs at the service center.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
203
Mobility Replacing components
Danger of burns Headlamp glass

Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
otherwise, there is the danger of getting ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Working on the lighting system lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
When working on the lighting system, If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
you should always switch off the lights af‐ with the light switched on, increasing humidity
fected to prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this.
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
on xenon headlamps
change, have the headlamp setting checked
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, and corrected by Service.
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lamps, bulb replacement
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlamps
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

1 Parking lamps
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
2 High beams/headlamp flasher
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment. 3 Low beams
These light-emitting diodes, which are related 4 Turn signal
to conventional lasers, are officially designated 5 Daytime running lights
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
204
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams

Follow the general instructions on lamps and 55-watt bulb, H7.
bulbs, refer to page 203.
1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ move.
ets and remove the cover.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it

from the holder and remove.
Turn signal
24-watt bulb, PY24W
1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the

wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.

4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn place.
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.

Make sure that the cap engages.
205
Accessing the daytime running lights, high High beams/headlamp flasher

beams/headlamp flasher and parking 55-watt bulb, H7.
lamps
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
from the holder and remove.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 196.

2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb.

3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
Parking lamps
place.
6-watt bulb, H6W.
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
206
Daytime running lights Headlamps

24-watt bulb, PW24W.
1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb

connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights

2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. xenon technology.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse The parking lamps and daylight running lights
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ are made using LED technology.
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
Contact your service center in the event of a
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
malfunction.
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Follow the general instructions on lamps and
Make sure that the cap engages. bulbs, refer to page 203.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,

please contact your BMW center.
207
21-watt bulb, PY21W Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐
row 2.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
holder counterclockwise and remove. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
verse order of removal. and screw on the wheel house panel.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on lamps and
Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 203.
bulbs, refer to page 203. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
35-watt bulb, H8. LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
208
Tail lamps, bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp

1. Open the tailgate.
At a glance
2. Use a screwdriver out of the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit to depress the catch fittings, ar‐
rows, and take off the cover.
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp 3. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver,
4 Tail lamps arrows.
5 Outside brake lamp
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W. 4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp, ar‐
The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐ row 1, and carefully pull it backward and
tact your service center in the event of a mal‐ out, arrow 2. Use your free hand to hold it
function. in place in order to prevent the tail lamp
from coming loose suddenly. Make sure
Use caution when replacing the bulb
Use caution and proceed one step at a
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐
age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀
209
that the foam rubber sealing ring is on the arrow 2. Make sure that the tail lamp en‐
centering pin. gages in the rubber mount.
5. Release the catch at the top on the con‐ 4. Screw the two nuts tight and mount the
nector of the connecting line and remove cover.
the connector from the bulb holder.
Lamps in the tailgate
Replacing the bulbs
1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on General information
the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder Follow the general instructions on lamps and
from the tail lamp, arrow 2. bulbs, refer to page 203.
Reversing lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
Accessing the lamps
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the

socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐ Slide the cover outwards, arrow, and remove.
teners.
Installing the tail lamp

1. Connect the connecting line to the tail
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the sealing ring is on the
centering pin and that it is not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1, and the inner part onto the screws,
210
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner Changing wheels

brake lamp
1. Loosen the two fasteners, arrow 1 and pull Hints
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐ The vehicle equipment does not include a
row 2. spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the

socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Insert the new bulb.
Installing the bulb holder

1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that
on questions regarding the battery.
the two exterior fasteners latch into place.
3. Place the cover back in position and slide it Battery replacement
inwards.
Use approved vehicle batteries only
Tail lamp, license plate lamp and Only use vehicle batteries that have been
central brake lamp approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
Follow the general instructions on lamps and otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
bulbs, refer to page 203. systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a After a battery replacement, have the battery
malfunction. registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
211
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully Disposing of old batteries
available and that any Check Control mes‐
Have old batteries disposed of by your
sages of these comfort functions are no longer
service center or bring them to a recy‐
displayed.
cling center.
Charging the battery Maintain the battery in an upright position for

transport and storage. Secure the battery so
Note that it does not tip over during transport.
Do not plug chargers into the socket

Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this Fuses
may damage the battery.◀
Notes
General information Replacing fuses
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
remains usable for its full service life. tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
drives. types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
In the engine compartment
Starting aid terminals 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 216, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: saving new, see user's
manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
212
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.

4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
The fuses are located under a cover. To open

the cover, reach into the recessed grip on the
side and fold the cover open.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
After initial use, insert the sheet in the holding
fixture on the inside of the cover.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the

three screws.
In the cargo area
Raise the cargo floor panel.
213
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Hints
All standard, country-specific and optional Emergency Request not guaranteed

equipment that is offered in the model series is For technical reasons, the Emergency
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
ment is also described that is not available in a able conditions.◀
equipment or country variant. This also applies Initiating an Emergency Request
Hazard warning flashers
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
Intelligent Emergency lished.
Request ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
Requirements lished.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on. When the emergency request is received
▷ The Assist system is functional. at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has Response Center contacts you and takes
been activated. further steps to help you.
▷ A ConnectedDrive contract is available. Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
General information steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
214
Breakdown assistance Mobility
if it can be established, are transmitted to Storage

the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ The first aid kit is located behind the left-hand
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ cover in the cargo area.
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Warning triangle
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
rectly.
To open, loosen the butterfly screws, arrows,
and fold down the trim.
Jump-starting
First aid kit Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
Note started using the battery of another vehicle
Some of the articles have a limited service life. and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
Check the expiration dates of the contents bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
regularly and replace any expired items To prevent personal injury or damage to both
promptly. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
215
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles The body ground or a special nut acts as the
Make sure that there is no contact be‐ battery negative terminal.
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ Connecting the cables
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
Starting aid terminals terminal.
Connecting order 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
Connect the jumper cables in the correct jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury battery, or to the corresponding starting
from sparking.◀ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
corresponding engine or body ground of
tive terminal.
the vehicle to be started.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
216
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ Towing

charged battery to recharge.
When the parking brake is blocked
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
The parking brake cannot be released
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ manually.
verse order.
Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake
Check the battery and recharge if necessary. blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.
Contact your service center.◀
Tow-starting and towing Follow the towing instructions

Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
Automatic transmission: transporting vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
your vehicle
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
Note otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
available.
Therefore, contact a service center in the
event of a breakdown. ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
Do not have the vehicle towed
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐
power assist. Consequently, more force
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
needs to be applied when braking and
cur.◀
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
Tow truck quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehicle
response.
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for

maneuvering the vehicle only. Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
217
Do not lift the vehicle Attaching the tow rope correctly

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
may result.◀ secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
cause damage.◀ front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart‐
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ ment on the left side in the cargo area. Open
pending on local regulations. the cover.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing Tow fitting, information on use
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
dow. the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Tow bar roads only.
The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
side on both vehicles. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe vehicle can occur.◀
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during
cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
218
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the top

edge.
Tow-starting
Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 215. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 62, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
219
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle equipment Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Automatic car washes
ment is also described that is not available in a Hints
Note the following:
for safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
Car washes ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Hints ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
Steam jets or high-pressure washers may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away ▷ Retract the rear spoiler.
and use a maximum temperature of ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
140 ℉/60 ℃. page 68, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a vation.
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ be triggered by the interior motion sensor
sively high pressures or temperatures can of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
cause damage or preliminary damage that may tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
then lead to long-term damage. refer to page 44.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure Guide rails in car washes
washer.◀
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
pressure washers could be damaged.◀
When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Before driving into a car wash
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
time and only from a distance of at least car wash, take the following steps:
12 in/30 cm.◀ Manual transmission:
Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves 1. Drive into the car wash.
in the area below the windshield when the
2. Shift to neutral.
hood is raised.
3. Switch the engine off.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. 4. Switch on the ignition.
220
Care Mobility
Automatic transmission: can be reduced and corrosion of the brake

discs can occur.
1. Drive into the car wash.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
2. Engage transmission position N.
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
3. Switch the engine off. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
In this way, the ignition remains switched wiper blade wear.
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car Vehicle care
wash
Car care products
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
otherwise, the transmission position P is
products from BMW, since these have been
engaged and damages can result.◀
tested and approved.
To start the engine:
Car care and cleaning products
1. Depress the brake pedal. Follow the instructions on the container.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ windows.
ping on the brake turns the ignition off. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside cles.
when in transmission position N. A signal is Cleansers can contain substances that are
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
vehicle.
Vehicle paint
Transmission position
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
value retention. Environmental influences in
cally:
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
▷ When the ignition is switched off. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
▷ After approx. 15 minutes. fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
Headlamps influences.
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
caustic cleansers. oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due immediately to prevent the finish from being
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with altered or discolored.
water.
Leather care
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an
ice scraper. Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
After washing the vehicle Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
221
Mobility Care
To guard against discoloration, such as from ularly when they have been exposed to road
clothing, provide leather care roughly every salt.
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Rear spoiler compartment
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially To ensure that the function of the rear spoiler
more visible. is not impaired, by leaves, snow or ice for ex‐
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and ample, the compartment that accommodates
grease will gradually break down the protective the rear spoiler should be cleaned regularly.
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Suitable care products are available from the
service center. Aside from water, treat only with rubber
cleansers.
Upholstery material care When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. silicon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
Fine wood parts
ble interior cleaner.
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
soft cloth.
material vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners Plastic components
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or These include:
other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
▷ Headliner.
closed.◀
▷ Lamp lenses.
Caring for special components ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
Light-alloy wheels ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Clean with a microfiber cloth.
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ Do not soak the headliner.
turer's instructions. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents or solvents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
components, such as the brake disk. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
Chrome surfaces to surface damage.◀
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
222
Care Mobility
Safety belts Cleaning displays

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Do not use chemical or household
thus have a negative impact on safety. cleansers.
Chemical cleaning Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀ Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
belts clipped into their buckles.
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety can result.◀
belts until they are dry.
Long-term vehicle storage

Carpets and floor mats
Your service center can advise you on what to
No objects in the area around the pedals consider when storing the vehicle for longer
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other than three months.
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐

ger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
223
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
Width, height
1 Vehicle height: 59.3 inches/1,508 mm 3 Vehicle width, with mirrors: 80.5 inches/
2 Vehicle width, without mirrors: 72 inches/ 2,047 mm
1,828 mm
226
Technical data Reference
Length, wheel base
1 Wheel base: 114.9 inches/2,920 mm 2 Vehicle length: 190 inches/4,827 mm
Smallest turning circle

Dia.: 39 ft/11.8 m Dia. with xDrive: 40 ft/12.30 m
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ matic transmission.
328i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,715/4,770

kg 2,139/2,164
Load lbs/kg 935/424
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,095/950
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,775/1,259
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.3–56.5/520–1,600
227
Reference Technical data
335i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,870/4,895

kg 2,209/2,220
Load lbs/kg 965/438
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.3–56.5/520–1,600
328i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,915/2,229
Load lbs/kg 935/424
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 18.3–56.5/520–1,600
228
Technical data Reference
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to

page 184
Windshield and headlamp 0.8/3

washer system
229
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alarm, unintentional 44 Automatic recirculated-air
All around the center con‐ control 150
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ sole 14 Automatic tailgate 38
tem 117 All around the headliner 15 Automatic transmission with
ACC, Active Cruise Control All around the steering Steptronic 70
with Stop & Go 123 wheel 12 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Acceleration Assistant, refer All-season tires, refer to Win‐ mate control 149
to Launch Control 72 ter tires 193 AUTO program, climate con‐
Activated-charcoal filter 151 All-wheel-drive 118 trol 147
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Alternating-code hand-held AUTO program, intensity 149
tion 113 transmitter 154 Auto Start/Stop function 64
Active Cruise Control with Alternative oil types 198 Average fuel consumption 86
Stop & Go, ACC 123 Antifreeze, washer fluid 69 Average speed 86
Active hood 98 Antilock Brake System, Axle loads, weights 227
Active Protection 114 ABS 117
Active rear spoiler 119 Anti-slip control, refer to B
Adaptive brake lights, refer to DSC 117
Brake force display 114 Approved engine oils 198 Backrest curvature, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 91 Arrival time 86 Lumbar support 50
Additives, oil 198 Ash tray 157 Backrest, width 50
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Backup camera 134
straints 48 tance 215 Band-aids, refer to First aid
After washing vehicle 221 Assistance when driving kit 215
Airbags 95 off 122 Bar for tow-starting/
Airbags, indicator/warning Assist system information, on towing 218
light 96 Control Display 89 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Attentiveness assistant 115 battery 211
culated-air mode 147, 150 AUTO intensity 149 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic car wash 220 remote control 32
Cooling function 147 Automatic climate con‐ Battery, vehicle 211
Air distribution, trol 146 Belts, safety belts 51
manual 147, 150 Automatic climate control Beverage holder, cu‐
Air drying, refer to Cooling with enhanced features 148 pholder 164
function 149 Automatic Cruise Control BMW Assist, see user's
Air flow, air conditioner 147 with Stop & Go 123 manual for Navigation, En‐
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic Curb Monitor 55 tertainment and Communi‐
control 150 Automatic deactivation, front cation
Air pressure, tires 185 passenger airbags 97 BMW Homepage 6
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic headlamp con‐ BMW Internet page 6
tion 151 trol 91 BMW maintenance sys‐
Alarm system 43 Automatic locking 42 tem 201
230
Everything from A to Z Reference
Bonus range, ECO PRO 176 Cargo area, enlarging 160 Child safety locks 61
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo area lid 38 Child seat, mounting 58
pholder 164 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Child seats 58
Brake assistant 117 ments 165 Chrome parts, care 222
Brake discs, breaking in 168 Cargo cover 159 Cigarette lighter 157
Brake force display 114 Cargo position, rear seat Cleaning, displays 223
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ backrest 161 Climate control 146, 148
play 114 Cargo, securing 172 Clock 80
Brake lights, adaptive 114 Cargo straps, securing Closing/opening from in‐
Brake pads, breaking in 168 cargo 172 side 38
Braking, hints 169 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Closing/opening via door
Breakdown assis‐ trol 32 lock 37
tance 214, 215 Carpet, care 223 Closing/opening with remote
Breaking in 168 Car wash 220 control 36
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Catalytic converter, refer to Clothes hooks 164
play 88 Hot exhaust system 169 Coasting 178
Bulb replacement 203 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with engine decou‐
Bulb replacement, front 204 ice 201 pled, coasting 178
Bulb replacement, halogen CD/Multimedia, see user's Coasting with idling en‐
headlamps 204 manual for Navigation, En‐ gine 178
Bulb replacement, rear 209 tertainment and Communi‐ Cockpit 12
Bulb replacement, xenon cation Collision warning with City
headlamps 207 Center armrest 163 Braking function 105
Bulbs and lamps 203 Center console 14 Combination switch, refer to
Button, RES 126 Center-Lock, see button for Turn signals 67
Button, Start/Stop 62 central locking 35 Combination switch, refer to
Bypassing, refer to Jump- Central locking system 35 Wiper system 67
starting 215 Central screen, refer to Con‐ Comfort Access 40
trol Display 16 COMFORT program, Dy‐
C Changes, technical, refer to namic Driving Control 121
Safety 7 Compartments in the
California Proposition 65 Changing parts 203 doors 163
Warning 7 Changing wheels 211 Compass 155
Camera, care 223 Changing wheels/tires 192 Computer 85
Camera, rearview cam‐ Check Control 77 Condensation on win‐
era 134 Checking the oil level elec‐ dows 150
Camera, Side View 137 tronically 197 Condensation under the vehi‐
Camera, Top View 138 Children, seating position 58 cle 170
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Children, transporting Condition Based Service
pholder 164 safely 58 CBS 201
Car battery 211 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Configure driving mode 122
Car care products 221 tem 58 Confirmation signal 42
Care, displays 223 Child restraint fixing system ConnectedDrive, see user's
Care, vehicle 221 LATCH 59 manual for Navigation, En‐
Cargo 171 Child restraint fixing systems, tertainment and Communi‐
Cargo area 159 mounting 58 cation
231
ConnectedDrive Services Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO Analyser 179

Connecting electrical devi‐ ment cluster 76 ECO PRO, bonus range 176
ces 157 Display in windshield 144 ECO PRO display 175
Control Display 16 Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO driving mode 175
Control Display, settings 87 strument lighting 93 ECO PRO mode 175
Controller 16, 17 Displays 74 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
Control systems, driving sta‐ Displays, cleaning 223 struction 177
bility 117 Disposal, coolant 200 EfficientDynamics 177
Convenient opening 36 Disposal, vehicle battery 212 Electronic displays, instru‐
Coolant 200 Distance control, refer to ment cluster 76
Coolant temperature 80 PDC 131 Electronic Stability Program
Cooling function 147, 149 Distance to destination 86 ESP, refer to DSC 117
Cooling, maximum 149 Divided screen view, split Emergency detection, remote
Cooling system 200 screen 21 control 33
Corrosion on brake discs 170 Door lock, refer to Remote Emergency release, door
Cruise control 129 control 32 lock 38
Cruise control, active with Drive-off assistant 122 Emergency release, fuel filler
Stop & Go 123 Drive-off assistant, refer to flap 182
Cruising range 80 DSC 117 Emergency Request 214
Cupholder 164 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Emergency service, refer to
Current fuel consumption 81 gent Safety 104 Roadside Assistance 215
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency start function, en‐
D gent Safety 104 gine start 33
Driving experience Emergency unlocking, trunk
Damage, tires 192 switch 120 lid 40
Damping control, dy‐ Driving instructions, breaking Energy Control 81
namic 118 in 168 Energy recovery 81
Data, technical 226 Driving mode 120 Engine, automatic Start/Stop
Date 80 Driving notes, general 168 function 64
Daytime running lights 91 Driving stability control sys‐ Engine, automatic switch-
Defrosting, refer to defrosting tems 117 off 64
the windows 147 Driving tips 168 Engine compartment 195
Defrosting, refer to Windows, DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine compartment, work‐
defrosting 150 trol 117 ing in 196
Defrosting the windows 147 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine coolant 200
Dehumidifying, air 147 trol 118 Engine idling when driving,
Destination distance 86 Dynamic Damping Con‐ coasting 178
Digital clock 80 trol 118 Engine oil 197
Digital compass 155 Dynamic Stability Control Engine oil, adding 198
Dimensions 226 DSC 117 Engine oil additives 198
Dimmable exterior mirrors 56 Dynamic Traction Control Engine oil change 198
Dimmable interior rearview DTC 118 Engine oil filler neck 198
mirror 56 Engine oil temperature 79
Direction indicator, refer to E Engine oil types, alterna‐
Turn signals 67 tive 198
ECO PRO 175
232
Engine oil types, ap‐ Flat tire, warning Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 198 lamp 100, 103 proved 227
Engine start during malfunc‐ Flooding 169 Gross weight, permissible for
tion 33 Floor carpet, care 223 trailer towing 227
Engine start, jump-start‐ Floor mats, care 223
ing 215 Fogged up windows 147 H
Engine start, refer to Starting Fold-out position, windshield
the engine 63 wipers 69 Handbrake, refer to parking
Engine stop 63 Foot brake 169 brake 66
Engine temperature 79 Front airbags 95 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Entering a car wash 220 Front fog lamps 93 nating code 154
Equipment, interior 153 Front fog lamps, front, bulb Hazard warning flashers 214
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ replacement 208 Head airbags 95
gram, refer to DSC 117 Front lamps 204 Headlamp control, auto‐
Exchanging wheels/tires 192 Front passenger airbags, au‐ matic 91
Exhaust system 169 tomatic deactivation 97 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
Exterior mirror, automatic Front passenger airbags, indi‐ ture 90
dimming feature 56 cator lamp 97 Headlamp flasher 67
Exterior mirrors 55 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 102 Headlamp glass 204
External start 215 Fuel 184 Headlamps 204
External temperature dis‐ Fuel cap 182 Headlamps, care 221
play 80 Fuel consumption, current 81 Headlamp washer system 67
External temperature warn‐ Fuel consumption, refer to Headliner 15
ing 80 Average fuel consump‐ Head restraints 48
Eyes for securing cargo 172 tion 86 Head restraints, front 52
Fuel filler flap 182 Head restraints, rear 53
F Fuel gauge 79 Head-up Display 144
Fuel quality 184 Head-up Display, care 223
Failure message, refer to Fuel recommendation 184 Heavy cargo, stowing 172
Check Control 77 Fuel, tank capacity 229 Height, vehicle 226
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuse 212 High-beam Assistant 92
tional alarm 44 High beams 67
Fan, refer to Air G High beams/low beams, refer
flow 147, 150 to High-beam Assistant 92
Fault displays, refer to Check Garage door opener, refer to Hills 170
Control 77 Integrated universal remote Hill start assistant, refer to
Filler neck for engine oil 198 control 153 Drive-off assistant 122
Fine wood, care 222 Gasoline 184 Hints 6
First aid kit 215 Gasoline quality 184 Holder for beverages 164
Fitting for towing, refer to Gear change, automatic Homepage 6
Tow fitting 218 transmission 71 Hood 196
Flat tire, changing Gear shift indicator 82 Horn 12
wheels 211 General driving notes 168 Hot exhaust system 169
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ HUD Head-up Display 144
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ amic glass sunroof 45 Hydroplaning 169
tor TPM 99 Glove compartment 162
233
I Interior lamps via remote con‐ Launch Control 72

trol 36 Leather, care 221
Ice warning, refer to External Interior motion sensor 44 LEDs, light-emitting di‐
temperature warning 80 Interior rearview mirror 56 odes 204
Icy roads, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Length, vehicle 227
temperature warning 80 matic dimming feature 56 Letters and numbers, enter‐
Identification marks, tires 190 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ ing 22
Identification number, refer to pass 155 Light alloy wheels, care 222
Important features in the en‐ Internet page 6 Light control 91
gine compartment 195 Interval display, service re‐ Light-emitting diodes,
iDrive 16 quirements 81 LEDs 204
Ignition key, refer to Remote Lighter 157
control 32 J Lighting 90
Ignition off 62 Lighting via remote con‐
Ignition on 62 Jacking points for the vehicle trol 36
Indication of a flat jack 211 Light switch 90
tire 100, 103 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ Load 171
Indicator and warning sion 71 Loading 171
lamps 77 Jump-starting 215 Loading position 161
Individual air distribu‐ Lock, door 37
tion 147, 150 K Locking/unlocking from in‐
Individual settings, refer to side 38
Personal Profile 33 Key/remote control 32 Locking/unlocking via door
Inflation pressure, tires 185 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort lock 37
Inflation pressure warning Access 40 Locking/unlocking with re‐
FTM, tires 102 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ mote control 36
Info display, refer to Com‐ sonal Profile 33 Locking, automatic 42
puter 85 Kickdown, automatic trans‐ Locking, central 35
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ mission 71 Locking, settings 42
tor TPM 100 Knee airbag 95 Lock, power window 45
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Locks, doors, and win‐
FTM 103 L dows 61
Instrument cluster 74 Low beams 90
Instrument cluster, electronic Lamp replacement 203 Low beams, automatic, refer
displays 76 Lamp replacement, front 204 to High-beam Assistant 92
Instrument lighting 93 Lamp replacement, rear 209 Lower back support 50
Integrated key 32 Lamps 90 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
Integrated universal remote Lamps and bulbs 203 mounted luggage rack 172
control 153 Lane departure warning 111 Lumbar support 50
Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lane margin, warning 111
quest 214 Language on Control Dis‐ M
Intelligent Safety 104 play 88
Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Lashing eyes, securing Maintenance 201
gram 149 cargo 172 Maintenance require‐
Interior equipment 153 LATCH child restraint fixing ments 201
Interior lamps 93 system 59
234
Maintenance, service require‐ Microfilter 148, 151 Oil, adding 198

ments 81 Minimum tread, tires 192 Oil additives 198
Maintenance system, Mirror 55 Oil change 198
BMW 201 Mirror memory 54 Oil change interval, service
Malfunction displays, refer to Mobile communication devi‐ requirements 81
Check Control 77 ces in the vehicle 169 Oil filler neck 198
Manual air distribu‐ Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, alternative 198
tion 147, 150 to Safety 7 Oil types, approved 198
Manual air flow 147, 150 Moisture in headlamp 204 Old batteries, disposal 212
Manual mode, transmis‐ Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Onboard monitor, refer to
sion 71 play 16 Control Display 16
Manual operation, door Mounting of child restraint fix‐ Onboard vehicle tool kit 203
lock 38 ing systems 58 Opening and closing 32
Manual operation, exterior Multifunction steering wheel, Opening and closing, from in‐
mirrors 55 buttons 12 side 38
Manual operation, fuel filler Opening and closing via door
flap 182 N lock 37
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ Opening and closing, with re‐
tance Control PDC 132 Navigation, see user's manual mote control 36
Manual operation, rearview for Navigation, Entertain‐ Opening the tailgate with no-
camera 135 ment and Communication touch activation 41
Manual operation, Side Neck restraints, front, refer to Operating concept, iDrive 16
View 137 Head restraints 52 Optional equipment, standard
Manual operation, Top Neck restraints, rear, refer to equipment 6
View 138 Head restraints 53 Outside air, refer to Auto‐
Manual transmission 70 Neutral cleaner, see wheel matic recirculated-air con‐
Marking on approved cleaner 222 trol 150
tires 193 New wheels and tires 192 Overheating of engine, refer
Marking, run-flat tires 194 No Passing Information 83 to Coolant temperature 80
Master key, refer to Remote Nylon rope for tow-starting/ Overtaking prohibitions 83
control 32 towing 218
Maximum cooling 149 P
Maximum speed, display 83 O
Maximum speed, winter Paint, vehicle 221
tires 193 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 202 Panoramic glass sunroof 45
Measure, units of 88 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Parallel parking assistant 140
Medical kit 215 agnosis 202 Park Distance Control
Memory, seat, mirror 54 Obstacle marking, rearview PDC 131
Menu, EfficientDynamics 177 camera 136 Parked-car ventilation 151
Menu in instrument clus‐ Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐ Parked vehicle, condensa‐
ter 85 line quality 184 tion 170
Menus, operating, iDrive 16 Odometer 80 Parking aid, refer to PDC 131
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Office, see user's manual for Parking assistant 140
ing concept 18 Navigation, Entertainment Parking brake 66
Messages, refer to Check and Communication Parking lamps 90
Control 77 Oil 197
235
Passenger side mirror, tilting Rear seat backrest, adjust‐ S

downward 55 ing 161
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Rear seat backrest tilt 161 Safe braking 169
era 135 Rear socket 158 Safety 7
PDC Park Distance Con‐ Rear spoiler, active 119 Safety belt reminder for driv‐
trol 131 Rearview mirror 55 er's seat and front passen‐
Pedestrian protection system, Rear window de‐ ger seat 52
active 98 froster 147, 150 Safety belts 51
Pedestrian warning with city Recirculated-air filter 151 Safety belts, care 223
braking function 109 Recirculated-air Safety Package, refer to Ac‐
Permissible axle load 227 mode 147, 150 tive Protection 114
Personal Profile 33 Recommended tire Safety switch, windows 45
Pinch protection system, brands 193 Safety systems, airbags 95
glass sunroof 46 Refueling 182 Saving fuel 174
Pinch protection system, win‐ Remaining range 80 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
dows 45 Remote control/key 32 play 16
Plastic, care 222 Remote control, malfunc‐ Screwdriver 203
Power failure 212 tion 37 Screw thread for tow fit‐
Power windows 44 Remote control, univer‐ ting 219
Pressure, tire air pres‐ sal 153 Seat and mirror memory 54
sure 185 Replacement fuse 212 Seat belts, refer to Safety
Pressure warning FTM, Replacing parts 203 belts 51
tires 102 Replacing wheels/tires 192 Seat heating, front 51
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reporting safety defects 9 Seat heating, rear 51
file 33 RES button 126 Seating position for chil‐
Programmable memory but‐ Reserve warning, refer to dren 58
tons, iDrive 22 Range 80 Seats 48
Protective function, glass Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Selection list in instrument
sunroof 46 TPM 100 cluster 85
Protective function, win‐ Retaining straps, securing Selector lever, automatic
dows 45 cargo 172 transmission 71
Push-and-turn switch, refer to Retreaded tires 193 Sensors, care 223
Controller 16, 17 Roadside parking lamps 91 Service and warranty 7
RON gasoline quality 184 Service history 82
R Roof load capacity 227 Service requirements, Condi‐
Roof-mounted luggage tion Based Service
Radiator fluid 200 rack 172 CBS 201
Radio-operated key, refer to Rope for tow-starting/ Service requirements, dis‐
Remote control 32 towing 218 play 81
Radio ready state 63 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Service, Roadside Assis‐
Radio, see user's manual for ponent, refer to Run-flat tance 215
Navigation, Entertainment tires 194 Services, ConnectedDrive
and Communication Rubber components, Settings, locking/unlock‐
Rain sensor 68 care 222 ing 42
Rear lamps 209 Run-flat tires 194 Settings on Control Dis‐
play 87
236
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Start/stop, automatic func‐ Telephone, see user's manual
ror 54 tion 64 for Navigation, Entertain‐
Shifting, automatic transmis‐ Start/Stop button 62 ment and Communication
sion 70 Start function during malfunc‐ Temperature, automatic cli‐
Shifting, manual transmis‐ tion 33 mate control 147, 149
sion 70 Starting the engine 63 Temperature display, external
Shift paddles on steering Status display, tires 99 temperature 80
wheel 72 Status information, iDrive 20 Temperature, engine oil 79
Side airbags 95 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Tempomat, refer to Active
Side View 136 Steering wheel, adjusting 56 Cruise Control 123
Signaling, horn 12 Steering wheel heating 57 Terminal, starting aid 216
Signals when unlocking 42 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ Text message, supplemen‐
Sitting safely 48 mission 70 tary 78
Size 226 Stopping the engine 63 Theft alarm system, refer to
Slide/tilt glass roof 45 Storage compartment in the Alarm system 43
Smallest turning circle 227 rear 164 Theft protection, refer to
Snow chains 194 Storage compartments 162 Central locking system 35
Socket 157 Storage compartments, loca‐ Thigh support 50
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ tions 162 Tilt alarm sensor 44
nostics 202 Storage, tires 193 Time of arrival 86
SOS button 214 Storing the vehicle 223 Tire damage 192
Spare fuse 212 Summer tires, tread 191 Tire identification marks 190
Specified engine oil Supplementary text mes‐ Tire inflation pressure 185
types 198 sage 78 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Speed, average 86 Surround View 134 tor, refer to FTM 102
Speed limit detection, on‐ Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tire Pressure Monitor
board computer 86 ing 120 TPM 99
Speed limiter, display 83 Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, changing 192
Speed Limit Information 83 ventilation 152 Tires, everything on wheels
Speed limit in the com‐ Switch, refer to Cockpit 12 and tires 185
puter 86 Symbols 6 Tires, run-flat tires 194
Split screen 21 Tire tread 191
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic T Tone, see user's manual for
Driving Control 121 Navigation, Entertainment
Sport automatic transmis‐ Tachometer 79 and Communication
sion 72 Tailgate 38 Tools 203
Sport displays, torque dis‐ Tailgate, automatic 38 Top View 138
play, performance dis‐ Tailgate opening with no- Total vehicle weight 227
play 87 touch activation 41 Touchpad 19
SPORT program, Dynamic Tailgate via remote con‐ Tow fitting 218
Driving Control 121 trol 36 Towing 217
Sport program, transmis‐ Tail lamps 209 Tow-starting 217
sion 71 Technical changes, refer to Tow truck 217
Sport steering, variable 119 Safety 7 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Stability control systems 117 Technical data 226 tor 99
Traction control 118
237
TRACTION program, Dy‐ V Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

namic Driving Control 118 tor TPM 99
Transmission, automatic 70 Variable sport steering 119 Width, vehicle 226
Transmission, manual 70 Vehicle battery 211 Window defroster,
Transporting children Vehicle battery, replac‐ rear 147, 150
safely 58 ing 211 Windows, powered 44
Tread, tires 191 Vehicle, breaking in 168 Windshield washer fluid 69
Trip computer 87 Vehicle care 221 Windshield washer noz‐
Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle equipment 6 zles 69
tion 67 Vehicle identification number, Windshield washer sys‐
Trip odometer 80 refer to Identification num‐ tem 67
Truck for tow-starting/ ber in the engine compart‐ Windshield wiper 67
towing 217 ment 195 Windshield wipers, fold-out
Trunk lid 38 Vehicle jack 211 position 69
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle paint 221 Winter storage, care 223
ing 40 Vehicle storage 223 Winter tires, suitable
Trunk lid opening with no- Vehicle wash 220 tires 193
touch activation 41 Ventilation 151 Winter tires, tread 191
Turning circle 227 Ventilation, refer to Parked- Wiper blades, replacing 203
Turning circle lines, rearview car ventilation 151 Wiper fluid 69
camera 135 Voice activation system 24 Wiper system 67
Turn signals, operation 67 Wood, care 222
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ W Word match concept, naviga‐
placement 209 tion 23
Warning indicators 77 Wrench 203
U Warning lamps 77
Warning messages, refer to X
Unintentional alarm 44 Check Control 77
Units of measure 88 Warning triangle 215 xDrive 118
Universal remote control 153 Washer fluid 69 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
Unlock button, automatic Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐ placement 207
transmission 71 pacity 229
Unlocking/locking from in‐ Washer nozzles, wind‐
side 38 shield 69
Unlocking/locking via door Washer system 67
lock 37 Washing, vehicle 220
Unlocking/locking with re‐ Water on roads 169
mote control 36 Weights 227
Unlocking, settings 42 Welcome lamps 90
Updates made after the edito‐ Wheel base, vehicle 227
rial deadline 7 Wheel cleaner 222
Upholstery care 222 Wheels, changing 192
USB interface 158 Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 185
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 102
238
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
0140 2 920 413 ue
*BL292041300P*

3 Series GranTurismo 01402920413 1307 En-Us BA 1307 f34 Print Ue PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

3 Series GranTurismo 01402920413 1307 En-Us BA 1307 f34 Print Ue PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Contents Owner's Manual for

A-Z The Ultimate Driving

THE BMW 3 SERIES

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Data memory

cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle Reporting safety defects

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 920 413 - VI/13

All around the steering wheel

1 Active rear spoiler 119 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Power windows 44 Intelligent Safety 104

Front fog lamps 93 Reduce distance 125

Parking lamps 90 Increase distance 125

Low beams 90 Cruise control rocker switch 130, 124

7 Steering column stalk, left

High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 85

Roadside parking lamps 91 Rain sensor 68

Computer 85 Clean the windshields and head‐

8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Start/stop the engine and switch

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

All around the center console

1 Headliner 15 9 Parking brake 66

5 Glove compartment 162 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 93

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 45 5 Interior lamps 93

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

Controls at a glance Switching on

Controller with navigation system

3. Move in four directions. 2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Press the but‐ Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

Press the but‐ Function Menu items in the Owner's Manual

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

Opening the Options menu

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The function is deactivated.

Operating the interactive map

Function Controls 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is

Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag the display inwards

Display menu. Tap once.

Example: setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is

Status field symbols

Radio symbols Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are switched

Symbol Meaning Split screen

Bluetooth is switched on.

SIM card is missing. 1. Press the button.

USB audio interface/mobile phone

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Switching between cases, letters and